Parameters

Table

Recommended value

Default

Frequency Band MCC MNC NCC

Cell_Common Cell_Common Cell_Common Cell_Common

GSM900&DCS1800 470 02 0~7 None None 0

BCC

Cell_Common

0~7

0

GPRS Support

Cell_Common

support GPRS

not support GPRS

EDGE Support

Cell_Common

No

No

Cellband

Cell_Common

0

0

RAC

Cell_Common

As per plan

As per plan

FH MODE

Cell_Common

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Cell_Common

63

62

Cell Extension Type

Cell_Common

Normal cell

Normal Cell

Cell Antenna Hopping

Cell_Common

None

None

UL DTX

Cell_Common

Shall Use

Shall Use

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Cell_Common

1

1

Direct Retry

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

DL PC Allowed TRX Index

Cell_Common TRx

Yes Depend on invidual site

Yes 65535

TRX No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

255

Cell Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

None

Site Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

65535

Active State

TRx

Activated

Activated

Receive Mode

TRx

Depends on BTS/site configuration

None

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Basic_Parameter

63

62

DL DTX

Basic_Parameter

No (tunable based on performance)

Yes

Direct Retry

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Basic_Parameter

1

8

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

UL DTX

Basic_Parameter

Shall Use

Shall Use

Flex HSN Switch

CH_MGT

Close

Close

th2(H) Call_Control 18 26 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26 63 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) Call_Control 3 4 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) Call_Control 2 4 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 3 15 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) Call_Control 12 16 .Flex MAIO Switch CH_MGT Close Close Allocation TRX Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes AMR DL Coding Rate adj.

hyst3(F) Call_Control 3 3 .hyst2(H) Call_Control 3 4 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 3 15 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) Call_Control 12 14 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) Call_Control 18 24 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26 63 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) Call_Control 2 4 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.

hyst2(F) Call_Control 3 3 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 12 As per plan AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3 1 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) Call_Control 3 2 .th3(F) Call_Control 26 30 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) Call_Control 2 2 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control 18 22 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.

th2(F) Call_Control 18 18 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 12 12 Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 52 MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4 4 Times N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23 23 .hyst1(F) Call_Control 2 2 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 26 As per frequency plan AMR UL Coding Rate adj.AMR UL Coding Rate adj.

Info.AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 52 AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 64 Directed Retry Load Access Threshold Call_Control 75 85 T3105(10ms) HO 7 7 Max Resend Times of Phy. HO 30 30 ULQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 DLQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 ULQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 65 DLQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 65 .

Threshold HO 50 60 MS Power Prediction after HO HO No No Inter-System Handover Enable HO No No PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes Yes MS Fast Moving HO Allowed HO No No Load HO Allowed HO Yes No SDCCH HO Allowed HO No No PT(s) Idle_Mode 0 0 TO Idle_Mode 0 0 . Threshold HO 50 60 DL Qual.UL Qual.

Cell_Bar_Qualify Idle_Mode 0 No PI Idle_Mode Yes Yes CRH Idle_Mode 6dB 6dB .

Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) Idle_Mode 60(should same for same LAC) 20 BS-PA-MFRAMS Idle_Mode 4 Multiframe Period 2 Multiframe Period BS_AG_BLKS_RES Idle_Mode 1 2 NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 255 11111111 .

Cell_Bar_Access Idle_Mode 0 No ATT Idle_Mode Yes Yes T3122(s) Other_Properties 10 10 T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000 1000 T3109(ms) Other_Properties 27000 27000 T8(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 T3121(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 T3107(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 T7(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 T3101(ms) Other_Properties 3000 3000 .

Band Threshold 3 (-dBm) Other_Properties 92 92 .Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm) Other_Properties 87 87 Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm) Other_Properties 85 85 Interf.

Interf. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm) Other_Properties 98 98 Interf. Power_Control 5 5 Filter Length for UL Qual. Power_Control 4 5 . Band Threshold 1 (-dBm) Other_Properties 105 105 Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm) Other_Properties 110 110 Filter Length for DL Qual.

Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1 DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 20 25 DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 30 35 .Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 5 5 Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 4 5 DL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3 DL Qual.

Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1 UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 25 20 UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 35 30 PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 Min Access Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 15 15 PRACH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 PBCCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 . Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3 UL Qual.UL Qual.

GPRS Penalty Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec GPRS Temporary Offset Data_In_PCU 10dB 10dB T3192 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms T3168 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms .

.

which improv This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. the frequency. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. For details. This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell. Each new cell can be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. a packet control unit (PCU) must be configured on the BSS side. For example. see GSM Rec. the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement the extended cell.Description This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC). GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band.08. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. Each routing area has an ID. Theoretically. The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC). Once the frequency band is selected. FH can be used to average the interferen This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. which is provided by the telecom operator. If this parameter is set to Not FH. This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC). A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay. This parameter specifies the network color code. 05. the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. TA equals 219. the MCC of China is 460. In a GSM cell. frame number. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message. that is. even if the TRX is configured with FH data. This parameter specifies the base station color code. a delay of about 120 This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function. for example. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. DCS1800: The cell This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state performs location management based on the routing area. it cannot be changed. value 0 indic This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC. . system information. Compared with GSM. and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS. In addition. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The NCC is unique nationwide.

Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. BTS3006C. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry. Internal 2G cells: 0-2047 External 2G cells: 2048-5047 External 3G cells: 5048-8047 This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. The following two points should be paid attention to: 1.This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. which must be unique in one BTS. The RF receive mode can be Not Support. the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. one-to-one mapping between them is not mandatory. This parameter specifies the TRX number. For details. When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a BSC. or Main Diversity. the TRX numbers may be discontinuous. In this case. In this case. It is n This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. many subscribers may fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. The DBS3900 GSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main Diversity. This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS. Thus a call may drop.. see GSM Rec. Dividing Receiver. Independent Receiver. not-activated and activated. the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board. BTS3012AE. This parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047. the TCHs (includi This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E. 2. 05. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board. The BTS3012. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message. . This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. BTS3012II. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). Four Diversity Receiver. This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU. and BTS3002E do not support Main Diversity. This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell.

08. This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks on. 05. this parameter can be configured. Thus. For details. If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network. see GSM Rec.08. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. . this parameter is set to YES. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. 05. Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES. see GSM Rec. a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry.This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell. Thus a call may drop. This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to be used. the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced. you must adjust the TRX configuration of the BTS and the network layout. In this case. For details. In directed retry. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell.

the recommended value is set to Yes. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. If RQI equals 1. In tight frequency resuse. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 0. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.5 dB. the CIR is 1 dB. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell. If RQI equals 1. Usually. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the TRX priority factor is effective. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority preferentially.5 dB. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. and so forth. the CIR is 1 dB. if RQI equals 2. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 0. . If this parameter is set to NO. the CIR is 1 dB. If this parameter is set to YES. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1. and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. In the case of aggressive frequency reuse. and so forth. the CIR is 0. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report.5 dB. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 1 dB. the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially. if RQI equals 2. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.5 dB. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. if RQI equals 2. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO. If RQI equals 1. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm.5 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. If RQI equals 1.5 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB. the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference among channels occur. and so forth. the CIR is 0. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. if RQI equals 2. and so forth. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. and so forth. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. if RQI equals 2. the TRX priority factor is ineffective. the CIR is 1 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report.

If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 1 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. If RQI equals 1. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call.5 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 0. if RQI equals 2. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.5 dB.5 dB. If RQI equals 1. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. and so forth.5 dB. and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 1 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. if RQI equals 2. and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. If RQI equals 1. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. . the CIR is 0. the CIR is 0. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 0. and so forth.5 dB. the CIR is 1 dB.5 dB. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. and so forth. If RQI equals 1. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.5 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 0. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. and so forth. if RQI equals 2. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the CIR is 1 dB. and so forth. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 1 dB. if RQI equals 2. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 1 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. If RQI equals 1. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call.

The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. and so forth. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 1 dB. If RQI equals 1. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 1 dB. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. If RQI equals 1. If RQI equals 1. and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 1 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 0. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 0. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.5 dB. if RQI equals 2. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. and so forth. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 1 dB. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 1 dB.5 dB. the CIR is 0. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.5 dB. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. if RQI equals 2. If RQI equals 1. if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 0. . the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. If RQI equals 1.5 dB. and so forth. the CIR is 0. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. if RQI equals 2.5 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. and so forth. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 0. if RQI equals 2.5 dB. If RQI equals 1. If RQI equals 1. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 1 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 1 dB. the CIR is 0.5 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.

if RQI equals 2. when the voice or data quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved through power control or channel handover. if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified interval. . If RQI equals 1. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the downlink radio link is considered as failed. After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH.5 dB. and so forth. it always listens to the messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the MS belongs. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the BTS should resend the I frame. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. Each time an SACCH message is not decoded. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the connection is to be re-established or released. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. and so forth. and so forth.5 dB. and so forth. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB.Therefore. For details of this parameter. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. If RQI equals 1. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 0. the counter S increases by 2. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 1 dB.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate Assignment Extend messages. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1.When the counter S is equal to 0. see GSM Rec. This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the SACCH message.08. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS. the CIR is 1 dB. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. the CIR is 1 dB.5 dB.5 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the counter S is enabled and the initial value is set to this parameter value. the CIR is 0. the counter S decreases by 1. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. 0408 and 05. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Each time an SACCH message is correctly decoded.

For details. After receiving the message. see GSM Rec. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. . If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS.58 and 04. the BTS sends the BSC a connection failure message. The Physical information containing information about different physical layers guarantees correct MS access. The maximum times for resending physical information is Ny1. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the BTS. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. During asynchronous handover. the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS. the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer T3105. see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)). 08. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. BTS resends physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. Upon detecting the bursts. This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions. see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)). the timer T3105 starts. This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry. This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. Meanwhile. When target cells are selected during direct retry. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from the MS. only the cells whose loads are smaller than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate target cells. Usually. the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. When the BTS sends physical information to the MS. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. 08.08. For details.This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. the BTS starts the timer T3105. For details. the BTS sends a Physical information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. see GSM Rec.If the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS. For details.08. which can also be a handover failure message.58 and 04.

Threshold. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. An intra-cell handover. If this parameter is set to Yes. When this parameter is set to Yes. the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes. however. . The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer. When an emergency handover is triggered. For details. the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. see GSM Rec. The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to adjust abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. The PBGT handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs. the cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be adjusted. This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs. see GSM Rec. If load handovers occur frequently in a partial area. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs. This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled. 0508 and 0408.This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled.08 and 04. and balance the traffic load among cells.08. The purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality. The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion. an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the DL Qual. the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. For details. When an emergency handover is triggered. thus improving the network performance. To avoid ping-pong handovers. Based on the path loss. the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the same layer and hierarchy. This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm. This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. Threshold. An intra-cell handover. This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. improve success rate of channel assignment. is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. 05. An emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the UL Qual. thus reducing the number of handovers. however. The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency handover.

For details. Actually. 1: barred 0: allowed Together with CBA. This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different LACs. see GSM Rec. that is. and PT are used. TO.08. This parameter can prevent frequent location update.In addition. the MS determines whether a cell is reselected based on the value of C1. It is invalid for cell reselection. a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details. thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. When PI is set to 0. this parameter determines the priority of cells. sent on the broadcast channel. the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. indicates whether CRO. .This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. For details. 04. the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system information and determines whether a cell is reselected. 0408 and 0508. When PI is set to 1. see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis. Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority 0 0 Normal Normal 0 1 Barred Barred 1 0 Low Normal 1 1 Low Normal Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short). see GSM Rec. C2 equals C1.

This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. When the signaling traffic of the network increases. the usage of radio resources drops.In addition. see GSM Rec. and the average standby time is greatly shortened. For details. see GSM Rec. that is.This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update.02. But the delay of paging messages increases. the service performance is improved. Abis interface. . This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel. the load on the A interface. After the CCCH is configured. In the VLR. an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. the capacity of the paging channel in a cell. This parameter is an information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages. In actual situation. take into consideration the processing capability of the MSC and BSC. In addition. the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel. the MS power consumption increases. HLR. If the value of this parameter increases. This parameter should be set on the basis that the paging channel is not overloaded. and the system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases. The load of the paging channels should be periodically measured on the running network. when the location update period decreases. a regular location update timer is defined. Generally. 05. thus reducing the number of MSs served by each paging sub-channel and prolonging the average service time of the MS battery. the value of the parameter should be as small as possible. a larger value is adopted in continuous coverage in urban areas and a smaller value in suburbs. this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH. If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1. A paging message must be sent simultaneously in all the cells in an LAC. Thus. If bit N is 0. 05.When setting this parameter. the MS does not measure the cell level of NCC N. Each bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. The value of this parameter should be adjusted on the basis of the load. must be the same as or similar to that in other cells of an LAC. the number of paging sub-channels in a cell. the MS reports the corresponding measurement report to the BTS. This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). or blind spots. that is. and VLR. the number of paging sub-channels in a cell increases.02 and 05. Um interface.08. When the location update period decreases. This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. For details about the calculation of the paging group. rural areas.

Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority 0 0 Normal Normal 0 1 Barred Barred 1 0 Low Normal 1 1 Low Normal This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. the BSC deactivates the channel. For different cells in the same LAC. After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message. This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS. Before the timer T3107 expires. see GSM Rec. If the timer expires. after the BSC sends a handover request message. the timer T7 is initiated. the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure. . If the timer expires. Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed. network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off. if the timer T3109 expires. Together with CBQ. 04. Before the timer T7 expires. This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover. T3101 is stopped. the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires. the timer T3107 is initiated. if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND message. In an outgoing BSC handover. After the timer T7 expires.This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA). The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops. The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If this parameter is set to Yes.08. the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. the BSC sends a handover failure message. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires. the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure message. This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. After the BSC sends a handover command. the MS makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires. After the timer T3107 expires. thus saving the network processing time and network resources. the BSS releases the seized SDCCH. For details. and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections. Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed. their ATTs must be the same. The MS reports a Clear REQ message. the outgoing BSC handover fails.

Band Thresholds.21. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. According to the strength of interference signals.This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. see GSM Rec. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. 08. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels.58. For details. the interference is not reflected. This helps the BSC to assign channels. then. This helps the BSC to assign channels. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The BTS. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. 08. For details. The BTS. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. then. According to the strength of interference signals. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The values of these levels are called Interf. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. and 12. the interference is too obvious.58. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels.08. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great. the interference is too obvious. For details. According to the strength of interference signals. the interference is too obvious. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. and 12. Band Thresholds. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. see GSM Rec.58. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. 08. sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. 08. the interference is not reflected. The BTS.08. 08. sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. This helps the BSC to assign channels. The values of these levels are called Interf. and 12. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. see GSM Rec. then. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great.21. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. 08. .21. the interference is not reflected.08.

sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. see GSM Rec. see GSM Rec. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. reports a radio resource indication message to the BSC.08. then. The values of these levels are called Interf. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. the interference is not reflected. the interference is not reflected. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds.58. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover.21.21. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs.58. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. This helps the BSC to assign channels. 08. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great. This helps the BSC to assign channels. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels.21. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. For details. and 12. The BTS. The values of these levels are called Interf. According to the strength of interference signals. Band Thresholds. see GSM Rec. the interference is not reflected. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. and 12. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The BTS. then. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. and 12. Band Thresholds. then. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The BTS.08. For details. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment. 08. sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. 08. The values of these levels are called Interf. the interference is too obvious. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. . 08. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great. 08. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. Band Thresholds. This helps the BSC to assign channels.58.08.This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. 08. the interference is too obvious. According to the strength of interference signals. According to the strength of interference signals. For details.

When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.2% to 6.8% to 1. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set.6% to 3. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.2% to 6. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0. power control is performed.4% to 12.8% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality.4% to 0.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. . power control is performed.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.4% to 12.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold.This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.6% to 3.8% to 1.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.8% When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality.2% to 0. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level.

4% to 12.6% to 3. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. .When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality.8% to 1. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level.8% to 1.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0. Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.6% to 3.2% to 6.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0. Value 1 indicates one PBCCH. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12. power control is performed.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3. Value 2 indicates two PRACHs.2% to 0. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.8% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. Value 12 indicates 12 PRACHs. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs. Value 1 indicates one PRACH.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.4% to 0.2% to 0.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8% When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. power control is performed. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as a candidate cell for handover. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0..4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold.2% to 6. . Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs.4% to 12..4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 4.4% to 0. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.

the MS responds immediately.This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. If the MS is in dual transfer mode. the MS sends the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts T3192 at the same time. When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS. This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message. T3168 is reset. The timer is sent through the system message broadcast in each cell. If T3192 expires. . This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS. This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message. it enters the dedicated mode. If the Packet Uplink Assignment message is still not received. If the MS receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message before T3168 expires. Otherwise. the MS releases the TBF resources and monitors paging channels. the MS initiates the PS access procedure again for four times. the MS regards that this uplink TBF establishment has failed. the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time. Value infinity indicates an infinity offset. If the MS does not receive the Packet Uplink Assignment message during the TBF release process. if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message. This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after receiving the last data block. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description. When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received. Therefore. T3168 is started to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message from the network. the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires. During the TBF release process. the MS enters the packet idle mode.

Configuration Policy

NSN PARAMETER

Name
BAND None None This parameter should be set as required. NCC 1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the received co-channel signals are useful signals. If a burst is incon MCC MNC

Parameter Name
frequency band in use mobile country code mobile network code

BSIC NCC

BCC

bsIdentityCode

None GENA GPRSenabled

None EGENA egprsEnabled

None BAND frequency band in use

None RAC routing area code

None HOP The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected. HoppingMode

DMAX

msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

None DMAX msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

None AHOP The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference DTX 2. On the downlink

dtxMode

The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based

RE

callReestablishmentAllowed

RXP

rxLevAccessMin

None DR drInUse

None DYNAMIC_SDCCH None None PENA TRX_ID powerCtrlEnabled TRX ID

None

TRX_NUM

None CI None BTS_ID CellId BTS ID

If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be activated. Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated. When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be set to Not Activated if the Active State of the upper-level BTS is set to STATE Not Activated.

Administrative State

None

RDIV The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected.

diversityUsed

DMAX

msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. This function has the following benefits: 1. Call reestablishment lasts for a long time. It is recommended that this parameter be set to Yes. If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side. From the network perspective. DOWNLINK DTX None DR If the value of this parameter is too small. many MSs attempt to camp on the cell. In such a case. If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side. The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage. the required level of received signals is low. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS.To enable this function. reducing system interference. From the network perspective. the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC side. the average call drop rate decreases. you must set the parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink and downlink levels. downlink DTX cannot be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter. RE The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. reducing system interference. DTX drInUse rxLevAccessMin callReestablishmentAllowed dtxMode None HSN1 hoppingSequenceNumber1 . the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. If this parameter is set to No. thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. and therefore the subscriber cannot wait and hooks on. and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS. the setting of this parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in a cell. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2.The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. Therefore. and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. this parameter should be set to No. RXP The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed.

None FLEXIBLE MAIO MANAGEMENT None TRP trxPriorityInTCHAlloc None amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis3 HRH3 None amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis2 HRH2 None amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis1 HRH1 None HRTD3 None HRTD2 None HRTD1 .

None HRH3 None HRH2 None HRH1 None HRTU3 None HRTU2 None HRTU1 None FRH3 .

None FRH2 None FRH1 None FRTD3 None FRTD2 None FRTD1 None FRH3 None FRH2 .

RET radioLinkTimeout maxNumberRetransmission None T200S SDCCH LAPDm T200 .None FRH1 None FRTU3 None FRTU2 None FRTU1 If this parameter is set to a small value. radio links are likely to be faulty and therefore call drops occur. this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. it is recommended this parameter be set to 1. This parameter takes effect on the downlink. If this parameter is set to a great value. a long time lasts before an MS disconnects a call. RLT This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the traffic volume is low. and therefore resource usage is low. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is high.

If the value of the parameter is too low. At present. it is difficult to select candidate target cells. the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. Four TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. the handover fails.The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities.If the transmission of the physical information over the FACCH is not complete. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER). AHRLT The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode. If the AMR function is enabled. the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. ARLT If the value of the parameter is too high. The physical information is sent over the FACCH. If the AMR function is enabled. the speech quality is improved. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls.An MS can be handed over only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO DETECT (120-180 ms). the expiration is invalid because the time is shorter than an FACCH period. the default value of this parameter is 70 ms. the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.Considering the previous factors. the cells with heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that the handover does not make sense. T3105 AMR HR Radio Link Timeout AMR Radio Link Timeout DRT drThreshold The value of this parameter can be increased when handover becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of clock problems or poor transmission. If the value of T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms. If it is set to a too small value. the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. 20 ms is the reasonable minimum value for this parameter. If it is set to a too small value. the BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer T3105 expires for the first time. Otherwise. If it is set to a too small value. the speech quality is improved. maxNumberOfRepetitions amrHoHrThrUlRxQual QURH amrHoHrThrDlRxQual QDRH amrHoFrThrUlRxQual QURF amrHoFrThrDlRxQual QDRF . Under the same frame erasure rate (FER). If it is set to a too small value. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode. NY1 The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls.

trhoTargetLevel ESD enableSDCCHHandover None PET penaltyTime None TEO temporaryOffset . Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference. FMT fastMovingThreshold enablePwrBudgetHandover If this parameter is set to YES. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. If it is set to a lower value. but the network interference is reduced. this parameter can be set to Yes. hoThresholdsQualDL POPT msPwrOptLev None ISHO Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be enabled. and thus the handover success rate is decreased. the MS does not use the maximum transmit power. QDR If this parameter is set to Yes. If it is set to a lower value.The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. QUR hoThresholdsQualUL The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. extra interference may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used. the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. TRHO When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled on the existing network. EPB It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load.

HYS cellReselectHysteresis cellReselectParamInd . If this parameter is set to a too small value. the cell that the MS camps on for a long time may not be the best after the LA changes. QUA cellBarQualify The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. C2 of an appropriate non-serving cell exceeds that of the serving cell in 5s and the following conditions are met: system information 3 and 4 of the serving cell) exceeds C2 of the serving cell in 5s. A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s. the MS reselects a cell.If a better cell exists. A better cell exists if the above conditions are met. If this parameter is set to a too great value. Thus. the MS re-calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). PI An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. ping-pong location updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH increases. the path loss is too large.and does not go to the previous cell within 5s.The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system. When necessary. and the C2 of the new cell minus 5 dB constantly exceeds the C2 of the serving cell in 5s.If yes. The MS constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to following conditions: Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops below 0 within 5s. the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed.

The location update period in the MSC must be greater than that in the BSC. Abis interface. such as the processing capability of the MSC and BSC.It is recommended that you select a greater value. such as 16. In an LAC. it is possible that the MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request for a long period. it is necessary to perform overall and long-term measurement on the entities involved regarding their processing capability and traffic. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of paging messages and reduce the system performance. PLMN plmnPermitted . HLR. in the area with heavy traffic. When the MS reselects another cell (in the same LAC). the value of this parameter should be the same in all cells. and the load on the A interface. Um interface. In this case. in the area with light traffic." even though the called MS is on. and VLR. system plays "The subscriber you dial is power off. MFR noOfMultiframesBetweenPagin g None AG noOfBlocksForAccessGrant The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the NCC. such as 2 or 3. When this parameter differs in the cells of the same LAC. it is possible that a powered-on MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request within a long period. the MS is restarted through T3212 timeout if the T3212 of the new cell differs from that of the original cell. the larger the number of paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each paging sub-channel. PER timerPeriodicUpdateMS The larger this parameter is set. In the GSM system. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call drops. To properly specify the value of this parameter. 20. but a smaller value. or 25.

this may increase the channel load and influence the access success rate. only handovers are allowed in a cell. The value of CBA affects the network access of an MS. If this timer is set to a lower value. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a higher value. and direct access of an MS is not allowed. this parameter should be set to 0. T3111 If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a higher value. BAR cellBarred None ATT allowIMSIAttachDetach If this timer is set to a lower value. this may influence the assignment success rate. this may influence the immediate assignment success rate. T3101 T3109 T8 T3121 T3107 T7 . If this timer is set to a lower value. T3122 If this timer is set to a higher value.The CBA function applies to special conditions. For a common cell. If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a lower value. If this timer is set to a lower value. If this timer is set to a higher value. this may influence the handover success rate. This condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. this may influence the handover success rate. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0.

None BO5 interferenceAveragingProcess None BO4 interferenceAveragingProcess None BO3 interferenceAveragingProcess .

you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. When you configure this parameter. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. QUS interferenceAveragingProcess pcAveragingQualDL / windows size pcAveragingQualUL / windows size . When you configure this parameter. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. QDS On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS.None BO2 interferenceAveragingProcess None BO1 interferenceAveragingProcess None BO0 On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality.

PC Lower Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level LDR PC Upper Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level UDR .On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. the downlink level becomes low. PC Upper Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual UDR If this parameter is set to a too great value. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter. the quality is good without power control. Thus. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. pcAveragingLevDL / windows size LUS pcAveragingLevUL / windows size If this parameter is set to a too great value. PC Lower Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual LDR If this parameter is set to a too great value. the quality is poor without power control. the downlink level becomes low. Thus. the conversation quality is degraded. the uplink level becomes high without power control. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. When you configure this parameter. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. the uplink level becomes high without power control. and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too small value. Thus. the conversation quality is degraded. LDS On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the quality is poor without power control. the battery life is reduced. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. Thus. the battery life is reduced. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. Thus. Thus. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. the quality is good without power control.

PC Lower Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual LUR If this parameter is set to a too small value. the quality is poor without power control. and call drop may easily occur. Thus. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. PC Lower Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level LUR If this parameter is set to a too great value. the signal quality of the MS is poor without power control. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. the battery life is reduced. the power control may be performed frequently. the uplink level becomes low. Thus. the conversation quality is degraded. The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected Level at HO Access. thus the conversation quality is degraded. Thus. and call drop may easily occur. the signal quality is good without power control. PC Upper Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual UUR If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the uplink level becomes low. the uplink level becomes high without power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the power control may be delayed. Thus. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus. thus wasting the resources. None PC Upper Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level INT SL powerControlInterval rxLevMinCell None PRB bsPRACHBlocks None PBB bsPBCCHBlocks . the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. UUR If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too small value.If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the quality is good without power control.

that is the GPRS congestion rate is low. but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment increases. the network must initiate a paging or immediate assignment procedure. However. the MS takes a longer period to detect the TBF establishment failure. When network resources are sufficient. thus shortening the TBF establishment time. the value of the T3192 timer depends on the average transmission interval between two successive downlink data. the average delay of packet access is long. On one hand. the TBF resources (including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. If the TBF establishment fails. If the timer is set to a smaller value. If the TBF establishment fails. T3192 If the timer is set to a lower value.If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell. If the timer is set to a higher value. If no downlink data needs to be sent. the downlink TBF establishment takes a longer period. If the download data packets from the network are not received and T3192 does not expire. if the network sends new downlink PDU data packets. this parameter should be set to a high value when the coverage area of the micro cell is large. T3168 . the MS releases the TBF resources within a shorter period. the T3192 should be set to a large value. but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment decreases. shortening the time to establish new TBFs and improving data transmission rate. thus increasing the probability of reassignment by the PCU and wasting system resources. In addition. the network directly sends a Packet Downlink Assignment message to establish a new downlink TBF. GPET gprsPenaltyTime None GTEO gprsTemporaryOffset If this parameter is set to a higher value. On the other hand. Therefore. the small timer value increases the probability of the retransmission of the packet access request. the average delay of packet access is short. many resources are not used but occupied for a long time. you need to comprehensively analyze the traffic models of the cell and take the service load of the cell into consideration. the MS can detect the TBF establishment failure within a shorter period.

.

7 Obligatory in creation when LCSE not connected to any segment. 0…7 N NoYes N Y/N GSM 900 (0) GSM 900 (0).. GSM 1900 (2).. GSM 800 (5) 255 0…255 No No/BB/RF TA 255 0. GSM 1800 (1).3 characters 1 0... GSM 800 (5) 3 characters 2.. GSM 1900 (2).. GSM 1800 (1).255 TA 255 2 0. otherwise read from RNW db..2 .Unit Step Size Default Value GSM 900 (0) Range GSM 900 (0)..

255 .N Yes/No dBm -105 -110...-47 N Yes/No Y 1 Yes/No 1.....10 characters Locked (3) N Y/N TA 255 0...16 F - 1…65535 1.

..63/N ..N Yes/No dBm -105 -110...2 0 0..-47 N Yes/No 2 0.

.5dB 2 0…15 0.5dB 0 0…15 0.5dB 2 0…15 .2 0..0 0.

.

.

. 2..SACCH 4 20 4. 4 or 7 .64 4 1.

.dBm -100 -110…-47 5 5..35 .

70 . -47/ N N Yes/No sec 20 20 20.7 dBm N -110... -47/ N Yes Yes/No SACCH 0 0.7 4 0.4 0.......640 dB 10 0 0.255 dBm N -109.......

..14 .N Y/N N Y/N dB 4 0.

.hours 0..5 4 2.....5 0 / 0.25.9 1 0.1.7 NCC 0…7 .

N Yes/No Y Yes/No .

...-47 dBm -95 -110.dBm -47 -47…FIXED dBm -90 -110..-47 .

...32 SACCH 1 1....-47 dBm -105 -110.32 ..dBm -100 -110..-47 dBm -110 -110…FIXED SACCH 1 1.

32 SACCH 4 1.SACCH 4 1.32 .....

.31 -110.-47 6 0…12 3 1…4 ..sec dBm 2 -100 0...

sec 10s 10 10…320 dB 0 0…70 .

615ms)) Cell_Bar_Access NCC Permitted BS_AG_BLKS_RES BS-PA-MFRAMS Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) CRH PI Cell_Bar_Qualify CRO(2dB) ACS TO PT(s) SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) Proposed Remarks Value Shall Use Shall Use NA Yes Not matched 0 1 with other vendor No No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes <1000000 NA 0> Tunable based on NA No performan ce 63 Old Value NA NA Yes NO Unit None None None None None Bit Period NO Yes 20 (32 NA Satelite Cells) NA 0 NA 255 NA 1 4 4 Multiframe Multiframe Period Period NA 6dB Yes 0 0 No 0 NA 24 40 6dB Yes 0 0 No 0 0 24 Need to standerdiz e To identify MS request 16 at -94 dBm or worst coverage Tunable based on performan ce Ericsson 60 RACH Busy Threshold 5 Paging Times 1 1 .Parameter Name UL DTX Call Reestablishment Forbidden RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN TCH Immediate Assignment Direct Retry UL PC Allowed DL PC Allowed Encryption Algorithm DL DTX MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment ATT Tx-integer(RACH Timeslot(equals to a TDMA frame.4.

200 1 60 50 50 150 200 60 60 No 5 5 5 23 29 34 No 4 If use Imm_Ass Retrans. 2(near to Dualband cell) Yes MS MAX Retrans Common Access Control Class Special Access Control Class Emergent Call Disable Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) ECSC All vendor same platform MBR Power Deviation Indication . 2(near to Dualband cell) Yes 2 4 (7 for Satelite Site) Not selected Not selected No 24 Yes 0(for normal cell). Default Directed Retry Load Access Threshold NA Speech Version NA TRX Aiding Function Control NA None Random Access Error Threshold RACH Min.Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable NA Disable Need to discuss with Huawei 47 Allowed & Recover When Check Res.Access Level T200 SDCCH(5ms) T200 FACCH/F(5ms) T200 FACCH/H(5ms) T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) Use LAPDm N200 N200 of Establish N200 of Release N200 of SACCH N200 of SDCCH N200 of FACCH/Half rate N200 of FACCH/Full rate Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter NA 0 60 50 50 150 200 60 60 No 5 5 5 23 29 34 No Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit(ms) NA Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass NA 4 (7 for Satelite Site) Not selected Not selected NA 20 Yes 0(for normal cell).

Power Deviation(2dB) Serving Band Reporting 1 NA 1 NA 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter Qsearch I NA NA Qsearch C Initial NA NA FDD Q Offset NA NA FDD REP QUANT NA NA FDD MULTIRAT Reporting NA NA FDD Qmin NA NA Qsearch P NA NA 3G Search PRIO NA NA Invalid BSIC Reporting NA NA Scale Order NA NA Qsearch C NA NA 900 Reporting Offset NA NA 900 Reporting Threshold NA NA 1800 Reporting Offset NA NA 1800 Reporting Threshold NA NA FDD Reporting Offset NA NA FDD Reporting Threshold NA NA .

Allow Reassign Allow EMLPP Immediate Assignment Opt. Short Message Uplink Disabled Short Message Downlink Disabled Frequency Band of Reassign Max Assignment Retry Times AMR ACS(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) AMR Starting Mode(F) AMR ACS(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) AMR Starting Mode(H) Co-BSC/MSC Adj SDCCH HO Allowed Intracell HO Allowed Load HO Allowed MS Fast Moving HO Allowed Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed PBGT HO Allowed Level HO Allowed Fringe HO Allowed BQ HO Allowed TA HO Allowed

No No NA No No No NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA No No Yes No No No Yes NA NA NA NA

No No NO No No Same Band 2 165 12 18 26 2 3 3 12 18 26 2 3 3 1 15 12 18 26 2 3 3 12 18 26 2 3 3 0 No No Yes Yes No No Yes NO Yes Yes Yes

Tunable based on performan ce

Tunable based on performan ce

None Tunable based on None performan ce None None

Concentric Circles HO Allowed Interference HO Allowed Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold Edge HO Watch Time(s) Edge HO Valid Time(s) Layer HO Watch Time(s) Layer HO Valid Time(s) PBGT Watch Time(s) PBGT Valid Time(s) Inter-layer HO Threshold Inter-layer HO Hysteresis

NA NA 5 10 5 4 5 4 5 4 NA 3

Yes (for MB cell), No for othres Yes 15 20 5 4 5 4 5 4 25 3

Grade Grade Second Second Second Second Second Second Tunable based on dB performan ce Tunable based on Grade performan ce Second Second

Min DL Level on Candidate Cell Intracell F-H HO Allowed Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s) F2H HO th H2F HO th Min Interval for TCH HOs Min Interval for SDCCH HOs Min Interval for Consecutive HOs Min Interval for Emerg.HOs Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed Penalty Allowed MS Power Prediction after HO MR.Preprocessing Transfer Original MR Transfer BS/MS Power Class Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR Allowed M.R Number Lost Filter Length for TCH Level Filter Length for TCH Qual Filter Length for SDCCH Level Filter Length for SDCCH Qual Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV Filter Length for TA Penalty Level after HO Fail Penalty Time after HO Fail(s) Penalty Level after BQ HO Penalty Time after BQ HO(s)

15 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 6 NA NA Yes No NA NA Yes NA NA 6 NA 2 NA 6 6 NA NA NA NA

10 Yes 5 4 30 10 4 2 6 2 NO Yes No Yes NO Yes Once Every Second 4 6 6 2 3 6 6 30 10 30 10

Second

None

None

Number of MR Number of MR None Number of MR Number of MR

dB

Penalty Level after TA HO Penalty Time after TA HO(s) Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s) TA Threshold DL Qual. Threshold UL Qual. Threshold UL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO DL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO Filter Parameter A1 Filter Parameter A2 Filter Parameter A3 Filter Parameter A4 Filter Parameter A5 Filter Parameter A6 Filter Parameter A7 Filter Parameter A8 Filter Parameter B No Dl Mr.HO Allowed No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit System Flux Threshold for Load HO Load HO Threshold Load Req.on Candidate Cell Load HO Bandwidth Load HO Step Period Load HO Step Level MS Fast-moving Watch Cells MS Fast-moving Valid Cells MS Fast-moving Time Threshold MAX Consecutive HO Times Forbidden time after MAX Times Interval for Consecutive HO Jud. Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) UL Expected Level at HO Access K Bias UL to OL HO Allowed OL to UL HO Allowed RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed TA for UO HO Allowed UO Signal Intensity Difference RX_LEV Threshold RX_LEV Hysteresis RX_QUAL Threshold TA Threshold TA Hysteresis UO HO Watch Time(s) UO HO Valid Time(s)

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 5 5 NA NA NA NA 20 6 NA NA 35 NA Yes Yes NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 NA NA

63 10 30 255 50 50 40 40 30 35 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 Yes 60 8 10 5 2 25 10 5 NA NA 15 3 20 6 30 40 35 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes No 0 40 NA 50 63 0 5 4 Need to discuss with Huawei

dB

None None None None None None None None None

dB Second dB None None Times Second Second dB Grade

None None None None None None None dB None Bit Period Bit Period Second Second

of Imme-Assign Allowed TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer OtoU HO Received Level Threshold UtoO HO Received Level Threshold UtoO Traffic HO Allowed Traffic Threshold of Underlay Underlay HO Step Period(s) Underlay HO Step Level Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail Outgoing-RAT HO Allowed System optimizatio n NA NA NA NA System optimizatio n Underlaid subcell NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA System optimizatio n 35 63 No 0 System optimizatio n Underlaid subcell 20 35 Yes Need to discuss with Huawei 5 5 5 30 5 3 NA 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter None dBm Bit Period None Bit Period None None Grade Grade None Second None Second Second Second None Better 3G Cell HO Allowed NA NA Inter-RAT HO Preference NA NA HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell NA NA RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO NA NA Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO NA NA 3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s) NA NA 3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s) NA NA Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP NA NA Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP NA NA .Assign Optimum Layer Assign-optimum-level Threshold TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. TA Pref. Pref.

Bad Trig Threshold UL Qual. Number Predicted DL MR. Upper Threshold DL Qual.Zone 1 MAX Down Adj.Value Qual. Lower Threshold Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Filter Length for UL Qual. Filter Length for DL Qual. Number Predicted MAX Down Adj.Zone 2 MAX Down Adj.Info. Bad Trig Threshold DL Qual.Value Qual.Value Qual. Upper Threshold UL Qual. PC Value by RX_LEV MAX Up Adj. Bad UpLEVDiff BTS PC Class AMR PC Interval AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV AMR Filter Length for UL Qual AMR Filter Length for DL Qual. UL Qual. Compensation Allowed NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 30 7 NA 35 25 0 4 30 20 0 4 4 NA 4 NA Yes 1 1 6 4 2 6 16 8 5 10 5 10 16 3 4 4 4 4 Yes . T3105(10ms) PC Interval UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold UL Qual. Compensation Allowed UL MR. Lower Threshold DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold DL Qual.Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP NA NA 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter None 10 ms Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade SACCH Period SACCH Period None Number of MR Number of MR dB dB dB dB dB dB None dB None dB Grade None SACCH Period SACCH Period SACCH Period SACCH Period None Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP NA NA Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT NA NA Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT Max Resend Times of Phy. AMR MR. MR.Zone 0 MAX Down Adj. Bad UpLEVDiff DL Qual. PC Value by Qual. MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.

Value Qual.of UL Level Threshold Interf. PC Value by RX_LEV AMR MAX Up Adj. Zone 1 AMR MAX Down Adj. Filter Length for SDCCH Level Filter Length for SDCCH Qual.of DL Level Threshold Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold Interf. PC Value by Qual. Zone 0 AMR MAX Down Adj.Allowed Allocation TRX Priority Allowed History Record Priority Allowed Balance Traffic Allowed Interf.of DL Qual. Lower Threshold AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold AMR DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff AMR BTS PC Class Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed Idle TCH Threshold N1 Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%) Interf. Number Predicted AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold AMR ULQual.AMR UL MR. AMR UL Qual. NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 80 60 NA NA NA NA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes NA NA NA NA 6 6 2 2 1 1 35 25 0 4 30 20 0 4 6 4 2 6 16 8 5 10 5 10 16 2 80 60 Yes Need to discuss with Huawei 1 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 30 50 25 50 6 6 2 2 MR Number MR Number Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade dB dB dB dB dB Grade dB None dB None dB None None Second None Minute Percentag e None None None None None Grade Grade Grade Grade Number of MR Number of MR None None . Lower Threshold AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Priority Allowed Active CH Interf. Meas. PC Value by Qual.Threshold Filter Length for TCH Level Filter Length for TCH Qual. AMR MAX Up Adj. Zone 2 AMR MAX Down Adj. Upper Threshold AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold AMR UL Qual. Value Qual. Upper Threshold AMR DL Qual. Number Predicted AMR DL MR.

Band Threshold 2 (-dBm) Interf.Updata Period of CH Record(min) Updata Freq.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms)) Max RC Power Reduction(2dB) Frame Start Time DC Bias Voltage Threshold Power Output Error Threshold Power Output Reduction Threshold VSWR TRX Unadjusted Threshold VSWR TRX Error Threshold Radio Resource Report Period(s) CCCH Load Indication Period(s) CCCH Load Threshold Overload Indication Period NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA None None NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 15 Second Average RACH Load Timeslot Number NA Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree) NA . Band Threshold 5 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm) Interf.of CH Record AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed NA NA NA 30 2 Yes 2 60 Yes 30 30 Need to discuss with Huawei <0110111 000> Yes 20 40 55 70 80 90 3 Need to discuss with Huawei 110 105 98 92 87 85 20 Need to discuss with Huawei 65535 3 2 2 2 2 10 15 80 15 5000 360 Minute None AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold NA TCH req suspend interval(s) Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid Subcell Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Underlaid Subcell Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted NA NA NA NA Second NA Data service Allowed SMCBC DRX Cell Load0 Threshold Cell Load1 Threshold Cell Load2 Threshold Cell Load3 Threshold Cell Load4 Threshold Cell Load5 Threshold Cell Load Change Delay Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm) Interf.

Included Angle(Degree) NA 360 Discard BCCH TS Power while calculating Power Control in BBHoppin g PWRC Not selected Yes MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Support Half Rate Abis Flow Control Permitted Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) Directly Magnifier Site Flag Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout) Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited DM response) Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO access fail) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM intervention) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not available) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other) Drop Optimize Release Indication Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link Failure Drop Optimize Equipment Failure Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time Drop Optimize Resource Check Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover Timeout Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch T3101(ms) ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) T3103A(ms) T3103C(ms) T7(ms) 5 (900). 0 (1800) Yes Yes 15 No 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Yes 3000 5000 10000 10000 10000 Second None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None ms ms ms ms ms . 0 (1800) NA Yes NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 5 (900).

T3107(ms) T3121(ms) T8(ms) T3109(ms) T3111(ms) TREESTABLISH(ms) T3122(s) NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 10000 10000 10000 27000 1000 15000 10 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms .

Parameters Table Recommended Value Single band 900MHz Default Multiband Frequency Band Cell_Common GSM900 GSM900&DCS1800 Administrative State Cell_Common Unlocked Unlocked Layer of the Cell Cell_Common 3 3 3 MCC Cell_Common 470 470 None MNC Cell_Common 02 02 None NCC Cell_Common 0~7 0~7 0 BCC Cell_Common 0~7 0~7 0 Cell Priority Cell_Common Prior-1 Prior-1 Prior-1 Activity Status Cell_Common Activated Activated Activated PCU Cell_Common 255 255 255 GPRS Support Cell_Common support GPRS support GPRS not support GPRS Support Baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes .

EDGE Support Cell_Common No No No 8PSK power attenuation grade Cell_Common 0 0 0 Support NACC Cell_Common No No No Support PACKET SI STATUS Cell_Common No No No Support NC2 Cell_Common No No No PCU Support 64 Neighbor Cells Cell_Common No No No Level report switch Cell_Common Support Support Support Cellband Cell_Common 0 2 0 RAC Cell_Common As per plan As per plan As per plan Support DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support Not Support Support Enhanced DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support Not Support Encryption Algorithm Cell_Common 00000001 00000001 1 FH MODE Cell_Common As per frequency plan As per frequency plan As per frequency plan DL DTX Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes .

55km)) Cell_Common 62 62 62 Cell Extension Type Cell_Common Normal cell Normal cell Normal Cell Cell Antenna Hopping Cell_Common None None None Enhanced Concentric Allowed Cell_Common No Yes Yes Cell Type Cell_Common Normal Cell Concentric Cell Normal cell Attributes of UL And OL Subcells Cell_Common NONE NONE NONE BCCH Concentric Attribute Cell_Common None Underlaid Subcell None UL DTX Cell_Common Shall Use Shall Use Shall Use Call Reestablishment Forbidden Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Cell_Common 1 1 1 TCH Immediate Assignment Cell_Common No No No Direct Retry Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes UL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes .MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.

TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None TEI TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 0 . TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 255 Cell Index TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None Site Index TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 65535 Board Type TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None Active State TRx Activated Activated Activated Abis Mode TRx Auto Auto Auto Cabinet No.DL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes Allow Dynamic Voltage Cell_Common Adjustment Yes Yes Yes TRX Index TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 65535 TRX No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 0 Slot No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 0 Subrack No.

(8K) TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 255 RSL In Site Port No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 2048 Hop Type TRx As per frequency plan As per frequency plan None Power Level TRx 0 0 0 Power Type TRx Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration Default HW_Concentric Attribute TRx None TRX Priority TRx Level0 Level0 Level0 Shut Down Enable TRx Enable Enable Enable TCH Rate Adjust Allow TRx Yes Yes No . TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 255 RSL In Site Timeslot No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None Out-BSC Port No.Out-BSC Subrack No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 0 Out-BSC Slot No.(8K) TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 255 RSL Logic No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None Out-BSC Timeslot No.

TRX 8PSK Level TRx 0 0 0 Wireless Link Alarm Flag TRx No No No Abnormal Release Statistic Base TRx 100 100 100 Abnormal Warn Threshold TRx 100 100 100 Abnormal Release Threshold TRx 50 50 50 Statical Period of Notraffic(5min) TRx 48 48 48 Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit TRx Yes Yes Yes WLA Prompting Recover Period(5min) TRx 12 12 12 Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour) TRx 8 8 8 End Time of WLA Detection(hour) TRx 22 22 22 Up Down Balance Basic TRx Difference 8 8 8 Up Down Balance Floating Range TRx 30 30 30 Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold TRx 80 80 80 Receive Mode TRx Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration None .

TRx 255 255 255 Reverse Out-BSC Timeslot No.(8K) TRx 255 255 255 Transmission Type of Abis Interface TRx TDM TDM TDM Maximum PDCH numbers of carrier TRx 8 8 8 MaxAbisTSOccupied TRx 32 32 32 Co-TRX for Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT) TRx 255 255 255 . TRx 255 255 255 Reverse RSL In Site Timeslot No.Send Mode TRx Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration None Allow Shutdown of TRX TRx Power Amplifier Yes Yes No Antenna Hopping Index TRx No No No Power Finetune TRx Default Default Default TRX Antenna Hopping TRx None None None Reverse Out-BSC Slot No.(8K) TRx 255 255 255 Reverse RSL In Site Port No. TRx 255 255 255 Reverse Out-BSC Port No.

InHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535 HubHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535 TRXNoInHub TRx 255 255 255 XPUSlotNo TRx 0 0 0 TRX Ability TRx 1 1 PhysicalPassNo TRx 1 1 Priority TRx NONE QTRU Priority TRx 255 255 RevInHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535 Time Slot Power Rerserve TRx 0 0 0 Allow Dynamic Voltage Basic_Parameter Adjustment Yes Yes Yes Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Basic_Parameter 63 63 62 DL DTX Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes .

Encryption Algorithm Basic_Parameter 1 1 1 DL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes UL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes Direct Retry Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes TCH Immediate Assignment Basic_Parameter No No No RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Basic_Parameter 1 1 8 Call Reestablishment Forbidden Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes UL DTX Basic_Parameter Shall Use Shall Use Shall Use GSM900 Band Traffic Load Share Threshold CH_MGT 25 25 25 Channel Assignment Allowed for Insufficient CH_MGT Power No No Yes Qtru Down Link Path Loss Compensation CH_MGT 4 4 4 Qtru Estimate Bts Power CH_MGT 35 35 35 Qtru Down Power Inadequate Last Time CH_MGT 3 3 3 Qtru Down Power Inadequate Stat Time CH_MGT 5 5 5 .

Qtru Power Sharing CH_MGT None None None Observed time of uplink received level difference Duration of uplink received level difference CH_MGT 5 5 5 CH_MGT 4 4 4 Smooth factor of uplink received level CH_MGT 6 6 6 Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load Tch Traffic Busy Underlay Threshold CH_MGT 100 100 100 CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes CH_MGT 50 50 50 Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid CH_MGT Subcell 50 50 50 Flex HSN Switch CH_MGT Close Close Close Flex MAIO Switch CH_MGT Close Close Close Fix Abis Prior Choose CH_MGT Abis Load Threshold(%) 80 80 80 Flex Abis Prior Choose CH_MGT Abis Load Threshold(%) 80 80 80 TCH req suspend interval(s) CH_MGT 60 60 60 AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold CH_MGT 40 40 40 .

AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed CH_MGT As per plan As per plan As per plan Update Freq.of DL Level Threshold CH_MGT 25 25 25 Interf.Threshold CH_MGT 40 40 40 Interf.Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes .of DL Qual. CH_MGT Yes Yes 6 Filter Length for TCH Level CH_MGT 6 6 4 Interf.of UL Qual.of UL Level Threshold CH_MGT 10 10 10 History Record Priority CH_MGT Allowed Yes Yes Yes Allocation TRX Priority CH_MGT Allowed Yes Yes Yes Active CH Interf. Threshold CH_MGT 40 40 40 Interf. Meas.of CH Record CH_MGT 2 2 2 Update Period of CH Record(min) CH_MGT 30 30 30 Filter Length for SDCCH CH_MGT Qual. 2 2 2 Filter Length for SDCCH CH_MGT Level As per frequency plan As per frequency plan As per frequency plan Filter Length for TCH Qual.

Interf.hyst3(H) Call_Control 10 10 15 AMR DL Coding Rate adj. Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%) CH_MGT 1 50 50 TIGHT BCCH Switch CH_MGT No No No Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT) CH_MGT Supported Not Support DPBT Not Support Channel Allocate Strategy CH_MGT Capability preferred Capability preferred Capability preferred Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) CH_MGT 60 60 60 Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum CH_MGT 80 80 80 Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 CH_MGT 2 2 2 AMR Starting Mode(H) Call_Control 2 2 2 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) Call_Control 2 2 4 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 30 30 63 .hyst2(H) Call_Control 4 4 4 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.

th3(H) Call_Control 30 30 63 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) Call_Control 4 4 4 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) Call_Control 12 12 16 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) Call_Control 2 2 2 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) Call_Control 12 12 14 AMR ACS(H) Call_Control 1101 1101 1101 AMR Starting Mode(F) Call_Control 2 2 2 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 38 38 30 .hyst2(F) Call_Control 4 4 3 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) Call_Control 18 18 24 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 10 10 15 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) Call_Control 2 2 4 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) Call_Control 18 18 26 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 6 6 3 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.

hyst2(F) Call_Control 2 2 2 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) Call_Control 4 4 2 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control As per frequency plan As per frequency plan As per frequency plan AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 5 5 1 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 20 20 12 AMR ACS(F) Call_Control 11100100 11100100 11100100 Max Assignment Retry Call_Control Times 2 2 1 Frequency Band of Reassign Call_Control Same Band Different Band Different Band Short Message Downlink Disabled Call_Control No No No Immediate Assignment Call_Control Opt.th2(F) Call_Control 28 28 22 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control Yes Yes 18 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control As per plan As per plan As per plan AMR UL Coding Rate adj. No No No Abis Resource Adjustment TCHH Function Switch Call_Control No No No .

Allow EMLPP Call_Control No No No Allow Reassign Call_Control Yes Yes Yes TDD Cell Threshold Call_Control 1 0 0 TDD Cell offset Call_Control 0 0 0 Best TDD Cell Number Call_Control 1 1 1 TDD Cell Reselect Diversity(dB) Call_Control 8 8 8 FDD Reporting Threshold Call_Control 0 0 0 FDD Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0 1800 Reporting Threshold Call_Control 0 0 0 1800 Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0 900 Reporting Threshold Call_Control 0 0 0 900 Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0 Qsearch C Call_Control 15 15 15 Scale Order Call_Control +0dB +0dB +0dB .

Invalid BSIC Reporting Call_Control No No No 3G Search PRIO Call_Control Yes Yes Yes Qsearch P Call_Control 15 15 15 FDD Qmin Call_Control 0 0 0 FDD MULTIRAT Reporting Call_Control 2 2 2 FDD REP QUANT Call_Control RSCP RSCP RSCP FDD Q Offset Call_Control 8 8 8 Qsearch C Initial Call_Control Use Qsearch_I Use Qsearch_I Use Qsearch_I Qsearch I Call_Control 15 15 15 Serving Band Reporting Call_Control 3 3 3 Power Deviation(2dB) Call_Control 1 1 1 Power Deviation Indication Call_Control Yes Yes Yes MBR Call_Control 0 0 0 ECSC Call_Control No Yes NO .

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) 24 24 52 Emergent Call Disable Call_Control No No No Special Access Control Call_Control Class 00000 00000 00000 Common Access Control Class Call_Control 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4 Times 4 Times 4 Times Max Transmit Times of Call_Control Imm_Ass 2 2 2 Max Delay of Imm_Ass Call_Control Retransmit(ms) 4 4 4 Use Imm_Ass Call_Control Retransmit Parameter No No No N200 of FACCH/Full rate Call_Control 34 34 34 N200 of FACCH/Half rate Call_Control 29 29 29 N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23 23 23 N200 of SACCH Call_Control 5 5 5 N200 of Release Call_Control 5 5 5 N200 of Establish Call_Control 5 5 5 .

Use LAPDm N200 Call_Control No No No T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) Call_Control 60 60 60 T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) Call_Control 60 60 60 T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) Call_Control 200 200 200 T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) Call_Control 150 150 150 T200 FACCH/H(5ms) Call_Control 50 50 50 T200 FACCH/F(5ms) Call_Control 50 50 50 T200 SDCCH(5ms) Call_Control 60 60 60 RACH Min.Access Level(dbm) Call_Control -115 -115 -115 Random Access Error Threshold Call_Control 200 200 180 TRX Aiding Function Control Call_Control Allowed & Recover When Check Res Allowed & Recover When Check Res TRX Aiding Not Allowed Speech Version Call_Control 11 11 11 AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) 24 24 52 24 24 64 .

AHR SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) AFR SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) 24 24 32 24 24 48 Directed Retry Load Access Threshold Call_Control 75 75 85 Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable Call_Control Disable Disable Disable Paging Times Call_Control 2 2 4 RACH Busy Threshold Call_Control 16 16 16 SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) 24 24 31 T3105(10ms) HO 7 7 7 Max Resend Times of Phy. HO 30 30 30 TDD Better 3G Cell HO HO Allowed No No 0 TDD 3G Better Cell HO HO Valid Time(s) 4 4 4 TDD 3G Better Cell HO HO Watch Time(s) 5 5 5 TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO HO 50 50 50 TDD HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell HO 25 25 25 .Info.

TDD Inter-RAT HO Preference HO Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold Cell By Threshold Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold Quick Handover Offset(dB) HO 68 68 68 Quick Handover Punish HO Value(dB) 63 63 63 Quick Handover Punish HO Time(s) 10 10 10 Ignore Measurement Report Number HO 1 1 1 Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number HO 4 4 4 Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number HO 4 4 4 Quick Handover Last Time (0.5s) 4 4 4 Quick Move Speed Threshold(m/s) HO 80 80 80 Quick Handover Down HO Trigger Level(dB) 63 63 63 Quick Handover Up Trigger Level(dB) HO 63 63 63 Inner Cell Serious HO OverLoad Threshold(%) 90 90 90 Number of Satisfactory HO Measurements(s) As per plan As per plan As per plan .5s) HO 3 3 3 Quick Handover Static HO Time(0.

Total Number of Measurements(s) HO 5 5 5 Inter UL And OL Subcells HO Penalty Time(s) HO 5 5 5 Outgoing OL Subcell HO HO level Threshold(dB) 25 25 25 Incoming OL Subcell HO HO level Threshold(dB) As per frequency plan As per frequency plan As per frequency plan Step Length of OL Subcell Load HO(dB) HO Yes Yes 5 OL Subcell Load HO Diversity HO Period(s) 10 10 10 Load HO of OL Subcell HO to UL Subcell Enabled No No No Modified Step Length of UL Load HO Period(s) HO 1 1 1 Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO(dB) HO 5 5 5 UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Period(s) HO 5 5 5 Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries of HO UL And OL Subcells(dB) Distance Between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells(dB) Allowed Flow Control Level of UL And OL Subcell HO 2 2 2 HO 10 10 10 HO 10 10 10 UL Subcell Serious HO Overload Threshold(%) 90 90 90 .

UL Subcell General HO Overload Threshold(%) 1 80 80 Assignment Optimization of OL HO Subcell Allowed Or Not Assignment Optimization of UL HO Subcell Allowed Or Not No No No Yes Yes Yes UL Subcell Lower Load HO Threshold(%) 50 50 50 Better 3G Cell HO Allowed HO No No No 3G Better Cell HO Valid HO Time(s) 4 4 4 3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 5 5 Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO HO 35 35 35 RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO HO 50 50 50 HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell HO 25 25 25 Inter-RAT HO Preference HO Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold Cell By Threshold Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold Ps UtoO HO Received Level Threshold HO 35 35 35 Ps OtoU HO Received Level Threshold HO 25 25 25 ReceiveQualThrshAMR HO HR 60 60 60 .

ReceiveQualThrshAMR HO FR 65 65 65 En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Step HO 5 5 5 En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Period HO 5 5 5 En Iuo Out Cell Serious HO OverLoad Threshold 90 90 90 En Iuo Out Cell General HO OverLoad Threshold 85 85 85 En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold HO 30 30 20 MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail HO 3 3 3 Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) HO 10 10 10 Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) HO 40 40 40 Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) HO 10 10 10 Underlay HO Step Level HO 5 5 5 Underlay HO Step Period(s) HO 5 5 5 UtoO Traffic HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes UtoO HO Received Level Threshold HO 32 32 35 .

0 0 0 TA Pref.OtoU HO Received Level Threshold HO 18 18 25 Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer HO Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell Pref. of ImmeAssign Allowed HO No No No TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. HO 63 63 63 Assign-optimum-level Threshold HO 35 35 35 Assign Optimum Layer HO System Optimization System Optimization System Optimization UO HO Valid Time(s) HO 4 4 4 UO HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 5 5 TA Hysteresis HO 0 0 0 TA Threshold HO 63 63 63 RX_QUAL Threshold HO 50 50 60 RX_LEV Hysteresis HO 5 5 5 . Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC HO System Optimization System Optimization System Optimization TA Threshold of ImmeHO Assign Pref.

HO 6 6 6 .RX_LEV Threshold HO 35 35 35 UO Signal Intensity Difference HO 0 0 0 TA for UO HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed HO No No No RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes OL to UL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes UL to OL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO HO 80 80 80 RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO HO 4 4 3 K Bias HO 0 0 0 UL Expected Level at HO Access HO 30 30 30 Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) HO 40 40 40 Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO HO 30 30 30 Interval for Consecutive HO Jud.

on Candidate HO Cell 75 75 75 Load HO Threshold HO 85 85 85 System Flux Threshold HO for Load HO 10 10 10 ULQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 60 DLQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 60 ULQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 60 65 .Forbidden time after MAX Times HO 20 20 20 MAX Consecutive HO Times HO 3 3 3 MS Fast-moving Time Threshold HO 15 15 15 MS Fast-moving Valid Cells HO 2 2 2 MS Fast-moving Watch HO Cells 3 3 3 Load HO Step Level HO 5 5 5 Load HO Step Period HO 10 10 10 Load HO Bandwidth HO 25 25 25 Load Req.

DLQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 60 65 RXLEVOff HO 5 5 5 RXQUAL12 HO 50 50 50 RXQUAL11 HO 51 51 51 RXQUAL10 HO 52 52 52 RXQUAL9 HO 53 53 53 RXQUAL8 HO 54 54 54 RXQUAL7 HO 55 55 55 RXQUAL6 HO 56 56 56 RXQUAL5 HO 57 57 57 RXQUAL4 HO 58 58 58 RXQUAL3 HO 59 59 59 RXQUAL2 HO 60 60 60 RXQUAL1 HO 70 70 70 .

Threshold HO 60 60 60 DL Qual.Ul Qual HO Limit HO 60 60 60 No Dl Mr.No Dl Mr. Threshold HO 60 60 60 .HO Allowed HO No No No Filter Parameter B HO 0 0 0 Filter Parameter A8 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A7 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A6 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A5 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A4 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A3 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A2 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A1 HO 10 10 10 UL Qual.Cons.HO Allowed Limit HO 8 8 8 No Dl Mr.

Emergency HO TA Threshold HO 255 255 255 DtxMeasUsed HO Open Open Open CfgPenaltyTimer HO 255 255 255 UmPenaltyTimer HO 10 10 10 RscPenaltyTimer HO 5 5 5 Filter Length for TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK HO 6 6 6 Filter Length for SDCCH HO NBR_RCVD_BLOCK 2 2 2 Penalty Time after HO AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s) 30 30 30 Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT HO 6 6 6 Filter Length for SDCCH HO REP_QUANT 2 2 2 Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP HO 6 6 6 Filter Length for SDCCH HO CV_BEP 2 2 2 Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP HO 6 6 6 Filter Length for SDCCH HO MEAN_BEP 2 2 2 .

R Number Lost HO 4 4 4 Min Power Level For Direct Try HO 25 25 16 Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR HO Twice every second Twice every second Twice every second .Penalty Time after TA HO(s) HO 30 30 30 Penalty Level after TA HO HO 63 63 63 Penalty Time after BQ HO HO(s) 15 15 15 Penalty Level after BQ HO HO 63 63 63 Penalty Level after HO HO Fail 30 30 30 Filter Length for TA HO 6 6 4 Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV HO 6 6 4 Filter Length for SDCCH HO Qual 3 3 2 Filter Length for SDCCH HO Level 3 3 2 Filter Length for TCH Qual HO 6 6 4 Filter Length for TCH Level HO 6 6 4 Allowed M.

Preprocessing HO No No No MS Power Prediction after HO HO No No No Penalty Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed HO No No No Min Interval for Emerg.HOs HO 6 6 4 Min Interval for Consecutive HOs HO 6 6 4 Min Interval for SDCCH HO HOs 2 2 2 Min Interval for TCH HOs HO 4 4 2 ATCBHoSwitch HO Open Open Open TIGHT BCCH HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 TIGHT BCCH HO Watch HO Time(s) 3 3 3 Quick Handover Enable HO NO NO NO .Transfer BS/MS Power HO Class Yes Yes Yes Transfer Original MR HO Yes Yes No MR.

H2F HO Threshold HO 10 10 10 F2H HO Threshold HO 30 30 25 Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s) HO 4 4 4 Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) HO 5 5 5 Intracell F-H HO Allowed HO Yes Yes YES Min DL Power on HO Candidate Cell HO 15 15 15 Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell HO 10 10 10 Inter-layer HO Hysteresis HO 3 3 3 Inter-layer HO Threshold HO 25 25 25 Inter-System Handover HO Enable No No No PBGT Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 PBGT Watch Time(s) HO 3 3 3 Layer HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 Layer HO Watch Time(s) HO 3 3 3 .

Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 Edge HO AdjCell Watch HO Time(s) 3 3 3 Edge HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 Edge HO Watch Time(s) HO 3 3 3 Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold HO 20 20 20 Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold HO 10 10 10 Interference HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Concentric Circles HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes TA HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes BQ HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Fringe HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Level HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed HO No No No .

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed HO No No No Load HO Allowed HO No No No Intracell HO Allowed HO No No No SDCCH HO Allowed HO No No No Co-BSC/MSC Adj HO Yes Yes Yes PT(s) Idle_Mode 0 0 0 TO Idle_Mode 0 0 0 ACS Idle_Mode No No No CRO(2dB) Idle_Mode 0 0 0 Cell_Bar_Qualify Idle_Mode No No No PI Idle_Mode Yes Yes Yes CRH Idle_Mode 6dB 6dB 6dB Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) Idle_Mode 60 60 20 BS-PA-MFRAMS Idle_Mode 4 Multiframe Period 4 Multiframe Period 2 Multiframe Period .

BS_AG_BLKS_RES Idle_Mode 2 2 2 NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 11111111 11111111 11111111 Cell_Bar_Access Idle_Mode No No No Tx-integer Idle_Mode 32 32 32 ATT Idle_Mode Yes Yes Yes Timer for UL Data Forward(ms) Other_Properties 10 10 10 WaitforRelIndAMRHR Other_Properties 26000 26000 26000 WaitforRelIndAMRFR Other_Properties 34000 34000 34000 T3103C(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 T3122(s) Other_Properties 10 10 10 TREESTABLISH(ms) Other_Properties 15000 15000 15000 T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000 1000 1000 T3109(ms) Other_Properties 27000 27000 27000 T8(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 .

T3121(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 T3107(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 T7(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 T3103A(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) Other_Properties 5000 5000 5000 T3101(ms) Other_Properties 3000 3000 3000 Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable Other_Properties No No No Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Other_Properties Enable No No No Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed Other_Properties No No No Qtru Signal Merge Switch Other_Properties No No No MAX Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period Average Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period Other_Properties 220 220 220 Other_Properties 180 180 180 Paging Numbers of one Other_Properties Optimizing Msgs 5 5 5 Interval For Sending Paging Optimizing Msgs Other_Properties 2 2 2 .

Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface Other_Properties Forced turn-on Forced turn-on Forced turn-on Interfere Band Stat Algorithm Type Other_Properties Interference Band Measurement Algorithm II Interference Band Interference Band Measurement Measurement Algorithm II Algorithm II Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes Lower-level sublink resources preemption Other_Properties switch No No No Sublink resources preemption switch Other_Properties No No No Force MS to Send Ho Access SWITCH Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes IntraCellHo to Ass SWITCH Other_Properties No No No Frequency Scan Result Other_Properties Type Maximum/Mean Value Maximum/Mean Value Maximum/Mean Value Drop Optimize IntraOther_Properties Cell Handover Timeout 1 1 1 Drop Optimize IntraBsc Out-Cell Handover Other_Properties Timeout 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Other_Properties Handover Timeout 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Other_Properties Handover Timeout 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Resource Check Other_Properties 1 1 1 Drop Optimize No MR Other_Properties For Long Time 1 1 1 .

Drop Optimize Forced Other_Properties Handover Failure 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Equipment Failure Other_Properties 1 1 1 Drop Optimize ABIS Other_Properties Territorial Link Failure 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Release Other_Properties Indication 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not available) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM intervention) Other_Properties 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO Other_Properties access fail) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail) Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error) 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited Other_Properties DM response) Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout) 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Directly Magnifier Site Other_Properties Flag No No No Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) Other_Properties 15 15 15 .

Abis Flow Control Permitted

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

Support Half Rate

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

No

MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Other_Properties

5

5

5

PWRC

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

ActGene

Other_Properties

5

5

5

PS LowPri ServicePRI

Other_Properties

6

6

6

PS HighPRI ServicePRI

Other_Properties

4

4

4

CS Data ServicePRI

Other_Properties

5

5

5

CS Voice ServicePRI

Other_Properties

3

3

3

Included Angle(Degree)

Other_Properties

360

360

360

Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree)

Other_Properties

360

360

360

Average RACH Load Timeslot Number

Other_Properties

5000

5000

5000

Overload Indication Period

Other_Properties

15

15

15

CCCH Load Threshold

Other_Properties

80

80

80

CCCH Load Indication Period(s)

Other_Properties

15

15

15

Radio Resource Report Other_Properties Period(s)

10

10

10

Frequency Adjust Value

Other_Properties

36671

36671

36671

Frequency Adjust Switch

Other_Properties

NO

NO

NO

VSWR TRX Error Threshold

Other_Properties

2

2

2

VSWR TRX Unadjusted Other_Properties Threshold

2

2

2

Power Output Reduction Threshold

Other_Properties

2

2

2

Power Output Error Threshold

Other_Properties

2

2

2

DC Bias Voltage Threshold

Other_Properties

3

3

3

Frame Start Time

Other_Properties

65535

65535

65535

Max RC Power Reduction(2dB)

Other_Properties

5

5

5

Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms))

Other_Properties

20

20

20

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 5 (-dBm)

85

85

85

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 4 (-dBm)

87

87

87

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 3 (-dBm)

92

92

92

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 2 (-dBm)

98

98

98

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 1 (-dBm)

105

105

105

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 0 (-dBm)

110

110

110

Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold

Other_Properties

3

3

50

SMCBC DRX

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

Data service Allowed

Other_Properties

118

118

118

Power boost before HO enabled or not

Other_Properties

StartUp

StartUp

not StartUp

Voice quality report switch

Other_Properties

report

report

not report

Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted

Other_Properties

255

255

Yes

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 8(dB)

Power_Control

53

53

53

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 7(dB)

Power_Control

50

50

50

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 6(dB)

Power_Control

47

47

47

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 5(dB)

Power_Control

43

43

43

Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 22 22 22 .Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 4(dB) Power_Control 40 40 40 HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 3(dB) Power_Control 30 30 30 HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 2(dB) Power_Control 20 20 20 HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 1(dB) Power_Control 0 0 0 HwIII UL MAX UpStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8 8 HwIII UL MAX DownStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8 8 HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16 16 HwIII UL FS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 12 12 12 Power_Control 16 16 16 Power_Control 12 12 12 Power_Control 16 16 16 Power_Control 16 16 16 Power_Control 22 22 22 HwIII UL FS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.

Upper Threshold(dB) HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual. Power_Control Lower Threshold(dB) 12 12 12 HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.Adjust Factor Power_Control 6 6 6 HwIII UL RexLev Adjust Power_Control Factor 4 4 4 HwIII UL Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16 16 Power_Control 12 12 12 Power_Control 16 16 16 . Slide Window Power_Control 1 1 1 HwIII UL RexLev Slide Window Power_Control 1 1 1 HwIII UL Rex Qual.HwIII UL RexLev Lower Power_Control Threshold 20 20 20 HwIII UL RexLev Upper Power_Control Threshold 30 30 30 HwIII UL Rex Qual.Exponent Filter Length Power_Control 3 3 3 HwIII UL RexLev Power_Control Exponent Filter Length 3 3 3 HwIII DL MAX UpStep (dB) Power_Control 8 8 8 HwIII DL MAX DownStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8 8 HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.

Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 22 22 22 HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16 16 HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Adjust Factor Power_Control 6 6 6 HwIII DL RexLev Adjust Power_Control Factor 6 6 6 HwIII DL Rex Qual. Power_Control Exponent Filter Length 3 3 3 HwIII DL RexLev Power_Control Exponent Filter Length 3 3 3 HwIII Traffic Channel Discard MR Number Power_Control 3 3 3 HwIII Signal Channel Discard MR Number Power_Control 1 1 1 . Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16 16 HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 22 22 22 HwIII DL RexLev Lower Power_Control Threshold 25 25 25 HwIII DL RexLev Upper Power_Control Threshold 35 35 35 HwIII DL Rex Qual.HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Slide Window Power_Control 1 1 1 HwIII DL RexLev Slide Window Power_Control 1 1 1 HwIII DL Rex Qual.

Power_Control 4 4 4 AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV Power_Control 16 16 16 AMR MAX Down Adj. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0 AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Power_Control Threshold 5 5 5 AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. Value Qual. Zone 0 Power_Control 4 4 4 . PC Value by Qual.HwIII Down Link Power Power_Control Control Adjust Period 3 3 3 HwIII Up Link Power Control Adjust Period Power_Control 3 3 3 HwIII Number of lost MRs allowed Power_Control 5 5 5 AMR BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16 16 AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0 AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Power_Control Threshold 5 5 5 AMR UL Qual. Zone 1 Power_Control 4 4 4 AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 2 Power_Control 4 4 4 AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Power_Control 8 8 8 AMR MAX Up Adj.

Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 0 1 AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Power_Control Threshold 25 25 20 AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Power_Control Threshold 35 35 30 AMR DL MR. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 0 1 AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Power_Control Threshold 30 30 25 AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Power_Control Threshold 40 40 35 AMR UL Qual. Number Predicted Power_Control 2 2 0 AMR MR. Number Predicted Power_Control 2 2 0 AMR UL MR.AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 2 2 3 AMR ULQual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 2 2 3 AMR DL Qual. Power_Control 6 6 6 AMR Filter Length for UL Qual Power_Control 6 6 6 AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 6 6 6 . Power_Control Compensation Allowed Yes Yes Yes AMR Filter Length for DL Qual.

PC Value by Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0 UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold Power_Control 5 5 5 UL Qual.AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 6 6 6 AMR PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 3 BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16 16 DL Qual. 8 8 8 MAX Up Adj.Value Qual. Power_Control 4 4 4 MAX Down Adj.Zone 2 Power_Control 4 4 4 MAX Down Adj.Value Qual. Number Predicted Power_Control 2 2 0 .Zone 0 Power_Control 4 4 4 DL MR. PC Value Power_Control by RX_LEV 16 16 16 MAX Down Adj. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0 DL Qual.Value Qual.Zone 1 Power_Control 4 4 4 MAX Down Adj. Bad Trig Threshold Power_Control 5 5 5 MAX Up Adj. PC Value Power_Control by Qual.

Power_Control 5 5 5 Filter Length for UL Qual. Number Predicted Power_Control 2 2 0 MR.UL MR. Compensation Allowed Power_Control Yes Yes Yes Filter Length for DL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 0 1 DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 30 30 25 DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 40 40 35 UL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 2 2 3 DL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 2 2 3 UL Qual. Power_Control 5 5 5 Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 5 5 5 Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 5 5 5 Power Control Algorithm Switch Power_Control HWII Power Control HWII Power Control HW-II Power Control DL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 0 1 UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 25 25 20 .

UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 35 35 30 PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 3 Constant of Filtering the Collision Signal Strength for Power Control Measured Receive Power Level Channel Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Data_In_PCU pdch pdch pdch BTS Power Attenuation on PBCCH Data_In_PCU -2dB -2dB -2dB Signal Strength Filter Period in Transfer Mode Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Signal Strength Filter Period in Idle Mode Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Initial Power Level Data_In_PCU 14 14 14 Alpha Parameter Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Maximum Value of N3105 Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Maximum Value of N3103 Data_In_PCU 3 3 3 Maximum Value of N3101 Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Release Delay of Downlink TBF(ms) Data_In_PCU 2400 2400 2400 Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF(ms) Data_In_PCU 2000 2000 2000 .

Release Delay of Nonextended Uplink TBF(ms) Data_In_PCU 120 120 120 Load Reselect Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 40 40 40 GPRS Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 EDGE 8PSK Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 16 16 16 EDGE GMSK Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Cell Reselect Interval(s) Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Normal Cell Reselection Worsen Level Threshold Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Cell Normal Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit Cell Load Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit 2G/3G Cell Reselection Strategy Data_In_PCU Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Cell Cell Preference for 2G Cell Filter Window Size Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Allowed Measure Report Missed Number Data_In_PCU 4 4 4 .

GBR for POC Service Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support . GBR for POC Service Data_In_PCU 16 16 16 Min.Load Reselection Receive Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 60 60 60 Load Reselection Start Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 85 85 85 MS Rx Quality Worsen Ratio Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 30 30 30 MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold Data_In_PCU 200 200 200 Cell Penalty Last Time(s) Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Cell Penalty Level Data_In_PCU 30 30 30 Cell Reselection Hysterisis Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Min Access Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 15 15 15 Support QoS Optimize Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support PS Concentric Cell HO Strategy Data_In_PCU No handover No handover No handover between between between underlaid underlaid subcell underlaid subcell subcell and overlaid and overlaid and overlaid subcell subcell subcell 650 650 650 Transmission Delay of POC Service Data_In_PCU Max.

Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support Support Gbr QoS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support Downlink Default MCS Type Data_In_PCU MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 Downlink Fixed MCS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED Uplink Default MCS Type Data_In_PCU MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 Uplink Fixed MCS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED BEP Period Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Link Quality Control Mode Data_In_PCU LA LA LA Down TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Down TBF threshold From CS3 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Down TBF threshold From CS2 to CS1 Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Down TBF threshold From CS3 to CS4 Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Down TBF threshold From CS2 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Down TBF threshold From CS1 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 .

Downlink Default CS Type Data_In_PCU CS2 CS2 CS2 Downlink Fixed CS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED Up TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Up TBF threshold From CS3 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Up TBF threshold From CS2 to CS1 Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Up TBF threshold From CS3 to CS4 Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Up TBF threshold From CS2 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Up TBF threshold From CS1 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Uplink Default CS Type Data_In_PCU CS1 CS1 CS1 Uplink Fixed CS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED Background Service Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 THP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 THP2 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 3 3 3 THP1 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 .

ARP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 ARP2 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 3 3 3 ARP1 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Timer of Releasing Abis Timeslot Data_In_PCU 15 15 15 Reservation Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Level of Preempting Dynamic Channel Data_In_PCU All dynamic All dynamic All dynamic channels can be channels can be pre.channels can be pre-empted empted preempted. Timer of Releasing Idle Dynamic Channel Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Dynamic Channel Conversion Parameter of Concentric Cell Data_In_PCU Only convert at UL Only convert at UL only convert dynamic channel at UL PDCH Downlink Multiplex Threshold Data_In_PCU 80 80 80 PDCH Uplink Multiplex Threshold Data_In_PCU 70 70 70 Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion Maximum Ratio Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Data_In_PCU 30 30 30 MultiBand reporting Data_In_PCU Report the frequencies of six strongest cells Report the frequencies of six strongest cells Report the frequencies of six strongest cells .

Threshold of HCS Signal Strength Data_In_PCU -110dB -110dB -110dB Cell HCS Prior Class Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Maximum TX Power for Access PCH Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Minimum Receiving level for Access Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Exclusive Access Data_In_PCU Not Exclusive Not Exclusive Not Exclusive Cell Access Bar Switch Data_In_PCU Permit Cell Access Permit Cell Access Permit Cell Access Accessorial Hysteresis of Cell Selection In New Routing Area Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB 2dB Cell Reselection Forbidden Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec 10sec Allow MS to Access to another Cell Data_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes Exceptional Rule for GPRS Reselect Offset Data_In_PCU 0 0 0 GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis Applied to C31 Criterion or not Data_In_PCU c31standard c31standard c31standard GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB 2dB Support PSI Status Message Data_In_PCU No No No Allow MR Command or not Data_In_PCU No No No .

PSI1 Repetition Period Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Persistence Level 4 Data_In_PCU 16 16 16 Persistence Level 3 Data_In_PCU 14 14 14 Persistence Level 2 Data_In_PCU 13 13 13 Persistence Level 1 Data_In_PCU 12 12 12 Extension Transmission Timeslots of Random Access Minimum Timeslots between Two Successive Channel Requests Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 4 Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 3 Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 2 Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 1 Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Access Control Class Data_In_PCU 0 0 0 PRACH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 PAGCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 4 4 4 .

96sec 0.36sec 15.96sec 0.24sec 0.24sec GPRS Reselection Offset Data_In_PCU -2db -2db -2dB GPRS Penalty Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec 10sec GPRS Temporary Offset Data_In_PCU 10dB 10dB 10dB Extension MR Period Data_In_PCU 60sec 60sec 60sec Extension MR Type Data_In_PCU type1 type1 type1 Interference Frequency Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 NCC_PERMITTED Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Extension Measurement Command Data_In_PCU em0 em0 em0 BSS Paging Coordination Data_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes Support 11BIT EGPRS Access Data_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes .36sec Non-DRX Period Data_In_PCU 0.36sec 15.PBCCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Transfer Mode Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Idle Mode Data_In_PCU 0.96sec Data_In_PCU 15.24sec 0.

Data_In_PCU 12 12 12 Pan Increment Data_In_PCU 4 4 4 Pan Decrement Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 BS_CV_MAX Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Control Acknowledge Type Data_In_PCU Four access Four access pulses Four access pulses pulses by default by default by default Access Burst Type Data_In_PCU 8bit 8bit 8bit Max.Routing Area Color Code Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Packet Access Priority Data_In_PCU Packet access of level 4 Packet access of level 4 Packet access of level 4 Support SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on CCCH Data_In_PCU No No No Network Control Mode Data_In_PCU nc0 nc0 nc0 Pan Max. Duration of DRX(s) Data_In_PCU 4 4 4s T3192 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms 500ms T3168 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms 500ms Network Operation Mode Data_In_PCU Network Network Operation Network Operation Mode Mode II Operation Mode II II .

numbered 1-4 respectively. The network designed by Huawei has four layers: Pico. for example. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. This parameter specifies the handover between the cells at the same layer. numbered 1-4 respectively. the cells at the same layer have the same priority. This parameter should be set as required. a packet control unit (PCU) None must be configured on the BSS side. the priority is high. 1. the priority of the layer is high. Macro. the MCC of China None is 460.Description Configuration Policy This parameter specifies the layer where a cell is located. This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC). If this parameter is set to a small value. The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. This parameter along with Layer of the Cell determines the priority of a cell. and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus The parameter specifies whether the PCU supports baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the received co-channel signals are useful signals. This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC). In addition. Generally. This parameter and Cell Priority determine the priority of a cell. The priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells fo None This parameter specifies the number of the PCU that is connected to the E1 link on the Pb interface. None This parameter specifies the network color code. If a burst is incon Each layer has 16 priorities. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the receive end. the priority is high. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. The activation status can be Not Activated or Activated. If the number of the priority is small. This parameter specifies the base station color code. None This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell. For details. The NCC is unique nationwide. If the number of the layer is small. numbered 1-16 respectively. and Umbrella. which is provided by the telecom operator. None . The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC). The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC. This parameter specifies the activation status of a cell. It m The network has four layers. refer to Layer of the Cell. Micro. The Pico layer is a microcell layer on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands.

Each new cell can be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. when the This parameter specifies whether the cell support the Network Assisted Cell Change MS is in the packet transmission mode. which improv None This parameter specifies the power attenuation level of a timeslot when 8PSK is used by an EDGE-enabled TRX. EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The BSC sends th This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Network Control 2 (NC2) function. the main and diversity level cannot be None reported. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system int This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell. mode. the PS service is not disrupted. the MS sends the Packet PSI/SI Status None message to the BSC. the default value is Support and can be manually modif This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. A5/2. This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side. None Each routing area has an ID. Once the frequency band is selected. the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. even if the TRX is configured with FH data. or NC2. Each level attenuates by 0. the MS of the system information about neighbor cells in In network control mode NC0. The attenuation value has 50 levels. When the cell is configured with the PBCCH. A5/1. the BSC reports the information about a maximum of 32 neighbor cells to the PC For the BTS3002C.2 None dB. when the MS is in the packet transmission advance. GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band. NC1. When the CS service is set up. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message. the BSC reports the This parameter specifies whether the PCU supports 64 neighbor cells. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0. If this parameter is set to the number of neighbor cells. the MS reports the measurement report of the reference cell and neighbor cells to the BSC. A5/3. If this parameter is set to Not FH.BTS22C and BTS20. it cannot None be changed. NC1. NC1. value 0 indic This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) function. the network informs (NACC) function. or NC2. Compared with the DTM function. information about all neighbor cells to the PCU when there In the NACC and NC2 functions. DCS1800: The cell This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state performs location management based on the routing area. FH can be used to average the interferen None None None None The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. No. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS. BTS3001C+. or NC2. The DTM function enables an MS to provide both the CS service and the PS service at the same time. indicating that the MS has stored the system message. when the This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the PACKET SI STATUS procedure. A This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used.This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with GSM. The function requires the support of the BSC. the enhanced DTM function enhances the CS setup and release. The BSC controls cell reselection (including normal reselections a If this parameter is set to Yes. That is. This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the enhanced DTM function. None In NC2. . This function has the following benefits: 1. this parameter affects the ability of the BSC to report are more than 32 neighbor cells. The value of this parameter has eight bits. For example. BTS3001C. The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits Yes: In network control mode NC0. For other types of BTSs. the network informs the MS of the system information about neighb No: In network control mode NC0. the default value is Invalid and cannot be manually modified.

This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. a This parameter specifies whether a cell is a normal cell or a concentric cell. Due to the difference in coverage. the frequency. see GSM Rec. see GSM Rec. 05. The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. If this parameter is set to No. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage. For details. and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. it is not configured in the UL subcell. frame number. If this parameter is set to a too small value. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. In the scenario of the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. many subscribers may None fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. many MSs attempt to camp on the cell. the average call drop rate decreases. TRXs in a concentric cell differ in coverage. 05. system information.This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. This function has the following benefits: 1. the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement the extended cell. the OL subcell and the UL The concentric cell technology can be combined This parameter specifies whether a cell is the OL subcell or the UL subcell. None If the cell supports the enhanced concentric cell function. the handover success rate may be affected. None None This parameter specifies whether the enhanced concentric cell handover is allowed in a concentric cell. a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay. If this parameter is set to Yes. this parameter should be set to No. In this case. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. None When the BCCH is configured in the OL subcell. In directed retry. the required level of received signals is low. If the value of this parameter is too small. the BSC can assign only an SDCCH None when receiving an initial access request. When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly. Therefore. thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops.08. If this parameter is set to No. None . thus. compare the receive level of the MS with OtoU HO Received Level Threshold and with UtoO HO As specified in Huawei concentric cell technology. It is n None This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. that is. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). you must set the parameter based This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. different frequency reuse modes. a delay of about 120 This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function. TA equals 219. In such a case. In This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. Thus a call may drop. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. In a GSM cell. This parameter specifies whether the main BCCH is configured in the OL subcell or the UL subcell. two subcells with different radiuses The TRXs of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell can use form a concentric cell. this parameter is set to Underlaid Subcell. the TCHs (includi This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed. Theoretically. For details. concentric cell is divided into an OL subcell and a UL subcell. the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request.08.

The default value is calculated automatically. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board. all the cells. can be also manually assigned to meet the requirement of operators. None This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume. Conversely. Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. This parameter specifies the number of the slot where a board is located. This parameter specifies the number of a cabinet. This parameter is used to differentiate boards with unique identifiers in the BTS. if you deactivate an activated BTS. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect. This parameter is used to identify multiple signaling links on the same physical link when None the LAPDs are multiplexed on the highway timeslot. . The timeslots. and boards in this BTS will be activated. that is. When the BTSs are cascaded. however. This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. and boards in this BTS will be deactivated. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047. TRXs. This parameter specifies the TRX number. all the cells. The manually assigned OML timeslot cannot be adjusted when the timeslot is arranged. The following two points should be paid attention to: 1. Internal 2G cells: 0-2047 External 2G cells: 2048-5047 External 3G cells: 5048-8047 None None None This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. This parameter specifies the terminal equipment identifier on the link layer. TRXs. This parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet. This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS. the timeslots are automatically calculated and assigned. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a None BSC. the BSC assigns the Abis time slot of OML automatically.. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E. This parameter specifies the number of a subrack. which must be unique in one BTS. the TRX numbers may be discontinuous. the lower-level BTS should be Generally. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect. not-activated and activated. This parameter specifies the Abis mode of OML. None This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power None amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes. None If you activate a not-activated BTS.This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed.

however. In other similar conditions. each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports. including the timeslot FH and frame FH. This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GEIUT or GOIUT is located in None the TC subrack. This parameter specifies whether a cell can convert full rate channels to half rate channels. The macro BTS and the mini BTS support different power levels. BTS reduces. the smaller the transmit power is. the cell including the timeslot FH and frame FH. the transmit power reduces by 2 dB. even if the TRX is configured with FH data. the indoor coverage becomes worse. The bandwidth of each E1 is divided into 32 timeslots. None This parameter specifies the TRX priority. the conversion is not allowed. you should lower the antenna and increase Each time this parameter increases by one level. The BTS2X supports frame FH and RF FH. or convert the half rate channels to full rate channels. For a concentric cell. If the forward ring of the BTSs functions. The greater this parameter Adjust the cell coverage area by configuring the Power is. the TCHF that has been converted to the TCHH will be forcedly restored. must be set to different E1 ports on the interface board. the TCHH that has been converted to the TCHF will be forcedly None . The E1 timeslot is numbered by 8 kbit/s. None This parameter specifies the concentric attribute of a cell. Generally. Level. The BTS3X of all This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. This parameter specifies the logical link number of the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) in the BSC.This parameter specifies the number of the TC subrack where the GEIUT/GOIUT is located. when the antenna is over high and covers When this parameter is set to 0. the higher the TRX priority is. This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied subrack. this parameter is set to None by default. If this parameter is set to Not FH. channels are allocated to the TRX with higher priority. this parameter is set to UL subcell or OL subcell according to actual conditions. This parameter is to be viewed only. When the BTS works in ring topology. the conversion is allowed. The smaller this parameter is. if the parameter is set to No.For example. 0-3 This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied E1 port. which is connected to the local subrack. If this parameter is set to Yes. timeslot 0 is used for synchronization and cannot be otherwise used. The doublewhere the TRX serves does not perform FH. this parameter specifies the number of the port None occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface. If all semi-permanent links are configured on one interface board. too many cells. frequency diversity. the transmit power level of the TRX is the greatest. When the transmit power of a For different types of BTSs. the tilt of the antenna first. which are numbered from 0 to 31. This parameter specifies whether to turn off the power amplifier of the TRX automatically for saving power when the BTS is powered by batteries after the external None power supply is cut off. the forward and reverse links None share one number. It is used for Huawei II channel assignment algorithm. When the semi-permanent link is configured on the electrical interface board. this parameter specifies the number of the None timeslot occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface. but do not support This parameter specifies the transmit power level of the TRX. the value range of this parameter is different. and the Out-BSC Port No. If the forward ring of the BTSs functions. and the range is 0-255. the In-BSC Port No. if the cell is not a concentric one. This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC timeslot occupied by the E1 port over the Abis interface. The FH can realize average interference and transceiver BTSs support the baseband FH and RF FH. This parameter specifies the out-BSC port number on the interface board used by the semi-permanent link. This parameter specifies the power levels supported by a TRX. Each LAPD link is uniquely numbered in one BSC. versions supports the cross-cabinet baseband FH and RF FH.

This parameter specifies the power attenuation levels of the EDGE TRX. the BTS detects the wireless link alarm. This parameter specifies whether a critical wireless link alarm is sent. an abnormal release clear alarm is sent. BTS3006C. None None The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm. the corresponding recovery alarm is sent by the BTS. If the parameter is set to Yes. this parameter is used to calculate the number of uplink None and downlink unbalance. The detection starts again until the next Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour). For the latest S times of channel activation. None Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold is set to 30. If this parameter is set to Yes. The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm. Dividing Receiver. such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each day. None the uplink and downlink unbalance alarm is generated. If the radio link prompt alarm is cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period. the BTS stops None detecting the wireless link alarm and sending the alarm related. None the wireless link alarm parameter is not sent. Until the end of the period specified by this parameter. Independent Receiver. Together with Up Down Balance Floating Range. such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each day. BTS3012II. This parameter specifies the statistics base of a sub-channel (the statistical times that a sub-channel that is activated). Four None Diversity Receiver. . If the duration of continuous (not accumulated) no-traffic reaches this threshold. this parameter needs to be set to meet the frequency requirements. If the radio link prompt alarm is not cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period. if the percentage of abnormally released If the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds the total successful channel activation threshold of a timeslot. This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power When the percentage of the uplink-and-downlink balance measurement reports in the total valid measurement reports is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter.2 dB. This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the wireless link alarm parameter to the BTS. an abnormally release alarm is generated. None None If the percentage of abnormally released channel in the total successful channel None activation is less than or equal to this threshold. the critical wireless link alarm is sent or not sent according to the settings of the parameter Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit. This parameter specifies the basic difference value caused by the specified level difference between the uplink channel and the downlink channel. Thus. Starting from the period specified by this parameter. otherwise. The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits GMSK signals. or Main Diversity. and the attenuation between levels is 0. and BTS3002E do not support Main Diversity. Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm This parameter specifies the permissible uplink and downlink balance floating range relative to Up Down Balance Basic Difference. The uplink and downlink is not balanced only when the uplink and downlink level exceeds the Up Down Balance Floating Range. the wireless link alarm parameter is sent. There are 50 levels. and sends an alarm related. B (the statistics base of a sub-channel on a timeslot) x N (the number of sub-channels on a timeslot) = S (the total times that channels on a timeslot that are activated). The RF receive mode can be Not Support. BTS3012AE. The BTS3012. the BTS sends a critical wireless link alarm if the wireless None link prompt alarm is not cleared during the period specified by WLA Prompting Recover Period. the noNone traffic alarm is generated. This parameter takes effect only for the EDGE-enabled TRX.

DDIVERSITY. Diversity Transmitter. or 3-IP. This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC port where the BSC interface board is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. None This parameter specifies the maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a TRX. the cabinet top output power of the BTS is different from the TRX output power. None This parameter specifies the transmission bearer mode of a TRX: 0-TDM. the number of the slot that holds the interface board. Power Booster Technology. If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions. This parameter specifies the number of the TRX that supports the PBT together with the current TRX. DDIVERSITY This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume. when the BSC performs the static power control on the TRX. the step of increasing or reducing the power of the TRX is 2 dB. this parameter specifies the number of the RSL None timeslot on the GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB port. Diversity Transmitter. When this parameter is set to the default value 255. which are numbered from 0 to None None If this parameter is set to a too great or too small value. The BTS3006C and BTS3002E support No Combining. None This parameter is to be viewed only. then the MS cannot receive the broadcast control messages from the main BCCH TRX properly. None Wide Band Combining. That is. the signals on certain frequencies are less affected by Rayleigh fading compared with those without antenna hopping. When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the electrical interface board. Therefore. the signals of one TRX can switch between different antennas instead of one TRX corresponding to one antenna. This parameter is to be viewed only. and the output power difference before and after the combination is not an integral multiple of 2 dB. DPBT. No Combining. the frequency. . The Antenna Hopping Index corresponds to a TRX number. That is.This parameter specifies the RF transmit mode of the TRX. This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC slot where the BSC interface board is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. This parameter specifies the following: Currently. 2HDLC_HUB. system information. the cabinet top output power of the BTS cannot be This parameter specifies whether the TRX supports antenna hopping. frame number. None This parameter specifies the maximum number of Abis timeslots occupied by the PDCHs None on a TRX. If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions. you can infer that no None TRX supports the PBT together with the current TRX. the TRX has different losses if it is combined on different tributaries. 1-HDLC. This parameter specifies the following: When the antenna hopping function is used. However. each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports. If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions. and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or the antenna for the main BCCH TRX is faulty. The RF transmit mode can be Not Support. it must be set to the number of the slot that is configured with the interface board. resulting in the failure of channel allocation. this parameter specifies the number of the port None occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface. which connects the BTS to the BSC. or Transmitter Independent or Combining. the number of the port on the interface board that connects the BTS to the BSC. In a GSM cell. This parameter can be modified according to the actual requirements. Thus. In some scenarios. this parameter specifies the number of the timeslot occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.

This parameter specifies the index of the in-BTS HDLC channel. This parameter specifies the index of an HDLC channel between the PEU and the PTU. The in-BTS HDLC channel None connects to the BTS TMU. The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. When the Work Mode is set to Free-run. When configuring RSL links. This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell. You must set this parameter when the Work Mode is set to Manual. If this parameter is set to a too small value. This parameter need not be set when the Work Mode is set to Auto. None This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power None amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes. the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter. None This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GXPUM (processing the RSL signaling) is located. This function has the following benefits: 1. There are two types of slot number: logical slot number and physical slot number. this parameter is This parameter specifies the HDLC channel index of reverse link in an HDLC ring network. This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. . set this parameter to the logical slot number of the GXPUM. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message. None The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. This parameter specifies the priority of the clock reference source. None This parameter specifies the allowed power difference between the maximum output power of the QTRU and the maximum nominal output power. None This parameter specifies the unique number of a TRX in the HUB domain in HUB HDLC transmission mode. the handover success rate may be affected.

This function has the following benefits: 1. Therefore. None The P/N criterion determines whether the observation time of QTRU downlink power is None insufficient. the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. None This parameter specifies the downlink signal strength estimated by the QTRU power sharing algorithm together with downlink power control target threshold. A5/3. None This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed. If a bit is set to 1. This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. That is.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). the BSC can assign only an SDCCH None when receiving an initial access request. E-GSM. many MSs attempt to camp on the cell. this is not The value of this parameter should be added in estimated power when the downlink path loss is estimated by the uplink path loss. suppose the MS supports multiple sub frequency bands of the 900 MHz frequency band. The value of this parameter has eight bits. In directed retry. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference This parameter specifies: for the channel assignment. the average call drop rate decreases. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.08. If a bit is 0. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. you must set the parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. For details. see GSM Rec. In such a case. this parameter should be set to No. If this parameter is set to No. see GSM Rec. Thus a call may drop. A5/2. In this case. A5/1. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. and A5/7 encryption algorithms respectively. None The P/N criterion determines whether the statistics time of QTRU downlink power is insufficient. None A5/5. The BSC assigns channels on the TRXs with priority of R-GSM. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0. The BSC ignores the priority of PNone GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands if the cell load is smaller than and equal to this threshold. the required level of received signals is low. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks on. For details. A5/6. you can infer This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. If this parameter is set to No. the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. If this switch is set to Yes. and when the remaining power of QTRU board is less than the call required None power of cell. 05. A5/4. . Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. this is allowed to assign the channel. If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage. This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. If the value of this parameter is too small. 05.. the BSC This parameter determines when the channel is assigned on the QTRU: When the channel is assigned on the QTRU board by using the dynamic power sharing algorithm.This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side. otherwise. thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. you must adjust the TRX configuration of the None None If this parameter is set to Yes. The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. PGSM frequency bands if the cell load is greater than this threshold. you can infer that the BSS supports the corresponding encryption algorithm. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).08.

this parameter is set to YES. Insufficient halfrate channels can be assigned to the MS. When the static Abis resource load is lower than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%). of available This parameter available TCHH /2) x dynamic TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. the full-rate channel is preferentially assigned. In tight frequency resuse. If this parameter is set to a higher value. halfrate channels are assigned. Static power sharing algorithm. During None the observation of P seconds. HSN is permitted to be used. When the total power of the carrier on the single QTRU board exceeds the maximum permissible output power. of busy TCHF + Num. This parameter specifies the QTRU signal merge algorithm. Thus. the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference among channels occur. TCHH Prior channels are required in None the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell. ofspecifies whether the100%. the TCHF or TCCH. Channel seizure ratio = (Num. if this situation lasts N seconds. The difference between static power sharing algorithm and dynamic power sharing If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels. the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. however. the BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0. During the channel assignment. but the corresponding downlink power control of a cell is None If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels.This parameter specifies the following definitions: 1. full-rate channels are assigned. Otherwise. full-rate channels are assigned. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. the capacity of the BSC is reduced. 3. that is. this parameter can be configured. Dynamic power sharing algorithm. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot -the lowest uplink signal strength of None this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels. halfrate channels are assigned. the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced. and the percentage of seized TCHs . the situation must be recorded. the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially. the full-rate or half-rate channel is preferred according to the dynamic Abis resource load. Otherwise. the call with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot. Channel seizure ratio = (Num. If this parameter is set to a higher value. Thus. of busy TCHF + Num.5 second. this operation is not performed during the period specified by this parameter. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell. of available TCHF + Num. This parameter is valid for the concentric The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. During the observation of P seconds. The channel type to be assigned is decided according to the channel types that are allowed by the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell. Thus. if this situation lasts N seconds. Otherwise. the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient halfrate channels can be assigned to the MS. the full-rate channel is preferred. Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES. The None parameter is valid for both built-in PCH and external PCU. Otherwise. the situation must be recorded. This parameter specifies when the BSC fails to convert the dynamic PDCH back to the TCH. the call with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot. None None None When the static Abis resource load is higher than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%) and the dynamic Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis None Load Thred(%). If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. 2. This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO. This parameter specifies the static Abis resource load threshold. This parameter specifies whether the BSC is allowed to assign the half-rate channels and full-rate channels to the MS according to the channel seizure ratio of the underlaid None subcell and overlaid subcell. the data in the host and BSC should be simultaneously None multiplied by 10 times to prevent the floating-point values. the situation must be recorded. the half-rate channel is preferred. If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. the power sharing algorithm needs to be enabled. the capacity of the BSC is reduced. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes. If the data configuration detects that the power sharing must be used. The value is 0-1 in fact. The QTRU power sharing algorithm is disabled.

the lower the quality is. the history priority of each channel is reduced by Update Freq. Principles of taking values are as follows: Generally. the influence of accidental factors may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. the burst influence may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. the history record priority is effective. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors. you need to obtain the average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of TCHs. Principles of taking values are as follows: This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to determine the signal quality on signaling channels. the network performance is If this parameter is set to a great value. If this parameter is set to YES. The higher the level. the judgment is imprecise. This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink interference is existed. If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink interference is existed. The greater the value. the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists.This parameter specifies whether the TCH/H is preferentially assigned on the basis of the channel type and current service channel seizure ratio that are allowed by the MSC. During the channel assignment. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. TCHH Prior channels are required in the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC. If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink interference is existed. the TRX priority factor is effective. The greater the value. the lower the signal quality is. If this parameter is set to YES. the TCHF or TCCH. If this parameter is set to NO. the greater the signal strength is. the lower the signal quality is. Usually this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high history record This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment. the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. set this parameter to 2. If this parameter is set to a higher value. If this parameter is set to a great value. the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. The signal quality on signaling channels should not be determined based on only one measurement result. and the system response is delayed. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. If this parameter is set to a great value. the history record priority is ineffective. the greater the signal is. When the Update Period of CH Record expires. the judgment is imprecise. If this parameter is set None to NO. The greater the value. If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink interference is existed. When this parameter is set to a higher value. the channel interference measurement is not performed None and the interference indication is not sent. the greater the signal strength is. If this parameter is set to a small value. If this parameter is set to a great value. the TRX priority factor is ineffective. If this parameter is set to a lower value. the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists.of CH Record at the interval of the setting value of this parameter to increase the channel priority. and then This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength. the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. the lower the quality is. the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes. and the percentage of seized TCHs The updating of the history record starts when the Update Period of CH Record times out. That is. If this parameter is None set to NO. this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority This parameter specifies whether the channel interference is considered in channel assignment. If this parameter is set to a lower value. The higher the level. the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. If this parameter is set to YES. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. The higher the level. the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. The higher the level. The signal quality on TCHs should not be determined based on only one measurement result. the greater the signal is. The greater the value. the process of updating the history record of channel occupancy is started. you need to obtain the average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH. If this parameter is set to a small value. If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level This parameter specifies whether the history record priority is considered in channel assignment. . the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. Thus. If this parameter is set to a small value. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to clculate the signal quality on speech/data TCHs. None None None If this parameter is set to a higher value. Update Freq of CH Record is subtracted from the history priority of each channel to improve the priority of the channel. If this parameter is set to a small value. the channel interference measurement is performed. Usually.

Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS. This parameter specifies whether to turn on the switch for the tight BCCH algorithm. if the current channel seizure ratio reaches or exceeds this value.5 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the forced handover may fail in the concentric cell. the requests cannot The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates. It is meaningless to set the parameter too large. the other three conditions for initiating the conversion from TCHFs to SDCCHs are as follows: This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a half-rate channel when a call is initially established. If this parameter is set to No. Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes to ensure that the timeslot arrangement can be performed in the cell. the CIR is 1 dB. None None Huawei recommends that the parameter Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed be set to No. the BSC tries to find a TCHF that can be converted to the SDCCH. The processing for the SDCCH recovered to the TCH is as follows: each cell is configured with a counter. the CIR is 1 dB. and highest coding rates in the ACS respectively. This parameter specifies one of the conditions for converting the TCHF to the SDCCH. 1. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3. None None None None . If the number of idle SDCCHs in the cell is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter. it needs to determine whether the number of SDCCHs after the conversion exceeds the Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum. If the number of idle SDCCHs > 8 + N1. If RQI equals 1. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the forced handover and call delay caused by timeslot arrangement can be avoided. if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the half-rate TCH is assigned preferentially. In a normal cell. this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with little interference. None By default. high. These types include: Capacity with a higher priority Quality with a higher priority PS coordination with a relatively higher priority This parameter specifies whether the combination of two half-rate TCHs into one fullrate TCH is allowed in a cell. the SDCCHs of a cell are in idle state. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. and so forth. the SDCCHs in the cell may be insufficient and the dynamic adjustment cannot be initiated. If the number of SDCCHs exceeds the value of this parameter. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 0. the fullrate TCH is assigned preferentially. and thus controls whether to enable the BCCH aggressive frequency reuse algorithm. and so forth. the counter descreases by 3. If this parameter is set too large. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Yes: Open No: Close This parameter specifies whether the current cell supports the dynamic transmission diversity or dynamic PBT: 0: not supported 1: dynamic transmission diversity supported 2: dynamic PBT supported This parameter sets the priority of different types in channel allocation. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. If RQI equals 1. If this parameter is set too large and consequently there is a small number of requests for SDCCHs. This parameter specifies the minimum time for the recovery of a TCH from an SDCCH.5 dB. If this parameter is set too small. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. and 3. Each time the TCH is converted to the SDCCH.This parameter specifies whether the interference priority is considered during channel assignment. the channel allocation If this parameter is set too small. the CIR is 1 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. representing the lowest. thus affecting the access of users. 2. but there may cause some TCHF-only calls to fail because the timeslot arrangement is unavailable. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Therefore. it cannot correctly indicate the idle state of the current SDCCHs and consequently the rollback of SDCCHs immediately triggers adjustment and affects the network performance. this field have four values 0. the CIR is 0. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. If this parameter is set too small and consequently there is a large number of requests for SDCCHs. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report.5 dB. the counter is set to ResTime. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB. if RQI equals 2. The value of the counter is adjusted every three seconds. otherwise. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report.5 dB. the BSC does not initiate the conversion. if the number of idle SDCCHs < 8 + Idle When the BSC determines whether to initiate the conversion from the TCH to the SDCCH. and so forth. In Huawei II channel assignment algorithm. low. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H). If RQI equals 1. there is an None It is recommended not to use the TIGHT BCCH algorithm in multiband network. the CIR is 0. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Besides this parameter.

and highest coding rates in the ACS respectively. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 1 dB.5 dB.5 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. if RQI equals 2. The five bits represent the coding rates from 7. This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a full-rate channel when a call is initially established. Otherwise. If RQI equals 1. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. high.5 dB. and so forth. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.5 dB. there is an This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. the CIR is 0. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. 2. The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H). the CIR is 1 dB. If RQI equals 1. and so forth. if RQI equals 2. if RQI equals 2. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 1 dB. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS. If RQI equals 1. this field have four values 0. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2.5 dB. there is an None None None None None None None None Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS. Therefore. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 0. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 1 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. and so forth. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 0. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 0. If RQI equals 1. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. None None None None . and 3. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 0. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. the CIR is 0. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. If RQI equals 1. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 1 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.5 dB. and so forth.5 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 0. if RQI equals 2. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. If RQI equals 1. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 1 dB. if RQI equals 2. and so forth. the CIR is 0. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. if RQI equals 2. If a bit is 1. the CIR is 0.40 kbit/s to 4. If RQI equals 1. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 0. if RQI equals 2. 1. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.5 dB.5 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.5 dB. the coding rate is included in the ACS. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 1 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 1 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Bit 1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained in the ACS. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 1 dB. representing the lowest. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 1 dB. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 1 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 0. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 0. if RQI equals 2.5 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. and so forth.5 dB. If RQI equals 1. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. low. One to four coding The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. and so forth. and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 1 dB. if RQI equals 2. and so forth. if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call.75 kbit/s (from left to right). The value of this parameter has five bits. the ACS does not include the coding rate.

Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. In specific cells. the CIR is 1 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 1 dB. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to the . the call completion rate of MSs is increased and the QoS of the network is improved. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. This parameter specifies whether to enable the Abis resource adjustment TCHH function. That is. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. sending point-to-point short messages on the downlink is parameter must be set to No. Reassigning radio channels can be performed in the carriers with the same frequency None None None None None None None None Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. If receiving short messages is allowed. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Otherwise. If RQI equals 1. and so forth. there is an This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates.75 kbit/s (from left to right).5 dB. One to four coding If this parameter is set to a great value. and so forth. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.5 dB. the BSC re-assigns radio channels and re-originates the assignment on the Um interface. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the coding rate is included in the ACS. transmission. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. thus improving the response speed of the on the signaling processing rate. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. if RQI equals 2. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. Thus the success rate of assignment can be increased. the CIR is 0. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 1 dB. if RQI equals 2. The eight bits represent the coding rates from 12. In satellite transmission mode. the CIR is 0. If RQI equals 1. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. this function can be enabled The channel activation and immediate assignment commands are sent at the same time to reduce the impact of the delay in satellite transmission to accelerate the signaling processing rate. the BSC does not report the message to the MSC immediately.5 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If a bit is 1. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report.5 dB.5 dB. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS. and so forth. If RQI equals 1. If RQI equals 1. the frequency band of the preferentially reassigned channel is different from what is used in the original assignment. however. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. and so forth. it is recommended that the default value Different Band be used. if RQI equals 2. If RQI equals 1.5 dB. For terrestrial network. and so forth. Instead. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. after receiving the assignment failure message from the MS on the SDCCH. and so forth. In normal assignment procedure. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 0. If this parameter is set to Yes. If RQI equals 1. This parameter specifies the maximum number of reassignments after the assignment on the Um interface fails. if RQI equals 2. The value of this parameter has eight bits. increases the load of the BSC. the CIR is 0. this messages. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. the default value of this parameter is No. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 1 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. This. the CIR is 1 dB. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. disabled to ensure sufficient radio channels for calls. MSs cannot receive short messages. the CIR is 1 dB. if RQI equals 2.5 dB. To improve the success rate of reassignment. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. This parameter determines whether the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to an None MS when the Abis resources are insufficient. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 1 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. When this parameter is set to Yes. Bit 1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained in the ACS. If RQI equals 1.5 dB. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. if RQI equals 2. the ACS does not include the coding rate. wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate.2 kbit/s to 4. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter during This parameter specifies whether to disable the sending of point-to-point short an upgrade.

Priorities 0-4 are used for subscribers all over the world. the MS starts to search for 3G cells. it is recommended that the value of this parameter be added to the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report. The measurement report is valid if the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement None report is greater than the value of this parameter. the BSC None None None None None None None None None . and then sequence the TDD cells.This parameter specifies whether to allow the enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption (eMLPP) function. the measurement report is valid. 0: -∞ (always select a cell if acceptable) 1: -28 dB 2: -24 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about an FDD cell is valid. and 0-4). The eMLPP supports a maximum of seven priorities (A. If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 10 dBm. After the valid measurement report is filtered. it adds the value of this parameter to the received signal level. This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a DCS1800 cell. When sequencing the priority of a DCS1800 cell based on its frequency band. 15]. the This parameter indicates that when the MS reports the EMR. and then converts the result into the RXLEV value. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in connection mode. the measurement report is valid. The two highest priorities are reserved only for local use in the network. the value of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report. 7] or above [8. level values 0-63 map with -100 dBm to -37 dBm. the network can use different policies such as queuing. If there are a large number of assignment failure messages. B. If the eMLPP function needs to be fully implemented. For example: If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5. the cell joins in the cell priority sequence. This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a TDD cell. After the measurement report is filtered. A TDD cell can become a candidate cell only when the average receive level of the TDD cell is greater than the TDD Cell Reselect Diversity of the serving cell. When the priority of a 3G cell is sequenced. If the Allow EMLPP is set to Yes. if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0. If the receive level of the 1800 MHz cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter. preemption. the value of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report. the MS with the lowest This parameter specifies whether to allow the reassignment function. In connection mode. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a DCS1800 cell is valid. After the valid measurement report is filtered. the TDD cell joins in the cell prioritization. the cell joins in the cell priority rank. When the priority of a GSM900 cell is sequenced on the basis of its frequency band. This helps to improve the call completion rate and the QoS of the network. the measurement report is valid. For details. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN TDD cells that should be contained in the None best cell list or in the measurement report. the 3G cell joins in the cell priority This parameter specifies the signal level offset of an FDD cell. the BSC initiates a reassignment when receiving an assignment failure message from the Um interface. and directed retry based on the priorities of different calls when network resources are occupied. In eMLPP. When the receive level of the GSM900 cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter.08. This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a GSM900 cell. when preemption occurs. 05. Add the value of this parameter to the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement None report. If the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter. see GSM Rec. This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a TDD cell is valid. the If this parameter is set to Yes. After the measurement report is filtered. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a GSM900 cell is valid.

it is recommended that classmark sending. In the inter-band handover. measurement results of six neighbor cells known and permitted by the NCC at the bands with the best signal The early classmark sending control (ECSC) specifies whether the MSs in a cell use early For a 900/1800 MHz CoBCCH cell. the MS reports the It is sent in the system information 2ter and 5ter. These neighbor cells must meet the following requirements: When Power Deviation Indication is set to Yes. a maximum of the value of Serving Band Reporting can be reported. 04. the MS None starts to search for 3G cells. if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0. RSCP. For example: If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5. None This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in idle mode. the 3G cell can be one None candidate cell for cell reselection. the transmit power of an MS is the MS maximum transmit power level plus the power calculated from the power deviation if None the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band does not receive the original power command after random access. None 0: -∞ (always select a cell if acceptable) 1: -28 dB 2: -24 dB This parameter specifies the threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in connection mode before Qsearch C is obtained. In packet transfer mode. the 3G cell becomes a candidate cell. The CM3 (classmark 3) information contains the power information of each recommended that this parameter be set to Yes. if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0. band of multi-band MSs.08. For example: This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for 3G cell reselection. This parameter specifies the measurement report counter of an FDD cell.This parameter specifies whether the EMR can contain the information about a cell with None an invalid BSIC. the MS reports the number of neighbor cells on different frequency bands. Ec/No means Signal Noise Ratio in WCDMA. 0: -20 dB 1: -6 dB This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN FDD cells that should be contained in the None best cell list or in the measurement report. see GSM Rec. it is . This parameter indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band on the basis of the maximum MS transmit power. This parameter is used for the MS to report neighbor cell explanation of multiple bands. None 15]. 05. This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to search for a 3G cell when the BSIC must be decoded. For details. 7] or above [8. the MS starts to search for 3G cells. If this parameter is set to 0. the MS sends additional classmark information to the network as early as For a 1800 MHz cell in the dual-band network. the If the system information indicates "MBR". 15]. see GSM Rec. 7] or above [8. None In a multiple band network. assignment. When the MS reports the number of neighbor cells on the same frequency band with the serving cell. For details. None This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in packet transfer mode. it is possible. In idle mode. It maps with C/I in GSM. The MS does not receive the original power command after random access.08. power class must be correctly If the A5/4-7 encryption algorithm is used.After a successful immediate this parameter be set to Yes. Serving Band Reporting is valid if Report Type is set to EMR. Only when the receive level of a 3G cell is greater than FDD Qmin. Received Signal Code Power Only when the average receive level of a 3G cell is FDD Q Offset greater than that of the serving cell. this parameter can be set on the basis of the traffic volume on each frequency band.

If this parameter is set to Yes. In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. it always listens to the messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the MS belongs. radio links are likely to be faulty and therefore call drops occur. the immediate assignment message is not retransmitted even if the Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) is not exceeded. the function is not obvious. emergency calls are allowed. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. emergency calls are not allowed only when the access control bit is set to 0 and Emergent Call Disable is set to Yes. thus preventing some MSs from accessing the network. 0000000001 indicates that the MSs of all classes except class 0 are allowed to access the network.This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the SACCH message. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SACCH.08. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too great value. None This parameter can be used to control network load based on the MS access classes. If this parameter is set to a too small value. This parameter is used for load control. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. the BTS should resend the I frame. the BTS should resend the I frame. the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is not sent. and therefore resource usage is low. Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. For MSs whose access class is from 0 to 9. This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the traffic volume is low. None None None None None . If the MS detects errors in an I frame. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. thus preventing some MSs from accessing the network. the message is not dispatched or retransmitted. the counter S is enabled and the initial value is set to this parameter value. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. It is recommended that this parameter be not used. Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS. Within the period specified by this parameter. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. For MSs whose access class is from 11 to 15. If the parameter is set to No. the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. Each time an SACCH message is not decoded. 000001 indicates that users of all classes except class 10 are allowed to access the network. see the descriptions of the Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is high. This parameter is used for load control. It is recommended that this parameter be not used. the counter S decreases by 1. If this parameter is set to a great value. If the parameter is set to Yes.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a halfrate channel). a long time lasts before an MS disconnects a call. it is recommended this parameter If this parameter is set to a too great value. the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is sent. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. congestion may occur This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of common access classes to access the network.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH. the BTS should resend the I frame. This parameter takes effect on the downlink. see GSM Rec. the BTS should resend the I frame. This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure. see the descriptions of the Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. Each time This parameter specifies whether to allow emergency calls. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I during the multiframe release.For example. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed. Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. If this parameter is set to a small value. the put-through rate of MS None This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the immediate assignment retransmission parameter to the BTS. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS.This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame. the immediate assignment message is dispatched and retransmitted. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. For example. 0408 and 05. This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of special access classes to access the network. the BTS should resend the I frame. the function is not obvious. When this number is reached. the BTS should resend the I frame. the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. if this parameter is set to No. Otherwise. this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a fullrate channel). After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure. see the descriptions of the Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. For details of this parameter. This parameter can be used to control network load based on the MS access classes.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions of the immediate assignment message. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed.

Under the same frame erasure rate (FER).04. the number of data retransmissions is reduced Generally. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER).0529 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. SAPI0 maps with speech services.1130 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs support the LAPDm N200 parameter. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. This parameter specifies the following rules for TRX aiding function control: TRX Aiding Not Allowed: The TRX aiding function is disabled. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHF over the Um interface. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. For details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)). For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. and SAPI3 maps with short message services. RACH Busy Threshold must be greater than RACH Min. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. and SAPI3 maps with short message services. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. the AMR coding This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. The entities at the two ends of this data link use the acknowledgement For the BTS3X in 03. If details. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. Allowed & Recover Immediately: The TRX aiding is enabled but the switchback is This parameter specifies the speech version supported by the BSC. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHH over the Um interface. the BSC If timer T200 is set to a too small value. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. None The six bits (from the most significant bit to the least significant bit) indicate the following speech versions respectively: half-rate version 3. the AMR function is enabled. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. T200 prevents the data link layer from deadlock during data transmission. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 when the SDCCH supports SAPI3 services. If the receive level of the RACH burst is greater than the value of RACH Min. BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback functions . It is set according to the actual BTS receiver sensitivity and the minimum MS access level. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH on the SDCCH. For supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. this parameter specifies the level threshold for the random access of the MS. the AMR coding This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. The data link layer transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors into a sequential non-error data link. Access Level. half-rate version 2. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SDCCH over the Um interface. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. full-rate The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. If this parameter is set to Yes. Allowed & Recover Forbidden: The TRX aiding is allowed but the switchback is forbidden after the faulty TRX is restored. see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)). If this parameter is set to a too great value. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. this parameter is set to 1. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. the speech quality is improved.This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter to the BTS. the allowable error for the random access signal is high and an MS can easily access the network. the BTS regards this access as an invalid one and no decoding is performed.30000. full-rate version 3. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. If the receive level of the RACH burst is smaller than the value of RACH Min. If details. the system determines whether the received signal is the random access signal of an MS through the correlation between training sequences (41 bits) and calculates the TA value. the BTS considers that an This parameter specifies the correlation between training sequences. The value of this parameter has six bits. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH Only the BTS3X in G3BTS32. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. the speech quality is improved. the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter. BCCH aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another normal TRX in this cell. SAPI0 maps with speech services. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. For details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. But the error report rate is high. the error report rate of the MS is low but the MS cannot easily access the This parameter specifies whether to enable the TRX aiding function. If timer N200 is set to a too small value.Access Level. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If this parameter is set to No.Access Level. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. the AMR function is enabled. half-rate version 1. According the GSM protocols. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. For supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding.

the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.An MS can be handed over only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout This parameter can be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is applied. the BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer T3105 expires for the first time. an alarm is generated. the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy. This parameter also affects handover access of RACH BURST If the value of this parameter does not match with the value supported by the BTS. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER). If the value of T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms. the counter for determining whether a radio link is faulty is set to the value of this parameter. Otherwise. 08. a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than the TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. The physical information is sent over the FACCH. The parameter and the paging times configured on the MSC side together determine the number of retransmissions of the paging message. When the BTS sends physical information to the MS. a TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered. If the value of the than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate parameter is too low. the more difficult for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier for the BSC to hand over the MS to a TDD 3G cell.08.58 and 04. The value of AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). cells. The greater the value of this parameter is set. When the BTS receives the SACCH measurement report from the MS. According to the P/N criterion. the cells with This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry. The greater the value of this parameter. The maximum times for This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions. the more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered. Four TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden. the AMR coding This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under full-rate AMR calls. BTS resends physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. the AMR coding This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under half-rate AMR calls. a TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered. When the receive level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold. The load of the cell is greater than or equal to Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold. heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that When target cells are selected during direct retry. the This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. this parameter specifies the level threshold for the MS random access when the BTS determines the RACH busy state. congestion may occur. Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. see the description of SACCH multi-frames. After receiving the message. If this parameter is set to a too great value. If For details. The This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of radio link connection failure. If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold. If For details. The total paging times is approximately equal to this parameter multiplied by the paging times configured on the MSC side. the 2G cell handover is preferred. the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. If both the Inter-System Handover Enable and the Better 3G Cell HO Allowed parameters are set to Yes. the directed try procedure is started if the following two conditions are met: The cell supports directed try. For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24). and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell. For details. the speech quality is improved.The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. The value of AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH If the value of the parameter is too high. For the BTS3X series and the double-transceiver BTSs. which can also be a handover failure message. The greater the value of this parameter is set. If the BTS successfully decodes the SACCH measurement report. If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS. this parameter must be set according to the actual receiver sensitivity of the BTS and the minimum access level of the MS to ensure the balance between the uplink and the downlink. if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. the Paging Times is set to 4 in the MSC. supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. Each time the BTS fails to decode the SACCH measurement report sent by the MS. if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. the BTS starts the timer T3105. When Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled is set to Yes. the more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered. see the description of SACCH multi-frames. Under the same frame erasion rate (FER). only the cells whose loads are smaller the handover does not make sense. see GSM Rec. this parameter only indicates whether the timeslot is busy.If the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the AMR function is enabled. . the counter decreases by 1. At present. supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. the 3G cell handover is preferred. This parameter specifies the total number of paging times. According to the P/N criterion. the AMR function is enabled.If the The value of this parameter can be increased when handover becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of clock problems or poor transmission. None Properly setting this parameter can increase the paging success rate. it is difficult to select candidate target target cells. The BSC does not support the mechanism for For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs. Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. The greater the value of this parameter is set. the speech quality is improved. the BTS sends the BSC a connection failure message.

that is. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. the period during which difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered. if If this parameter is set to a too small value. a fast handover is triggered. During a measurement period. the BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 3G candidate cells.During a handover decision. That is. a fast handover is triggered. That is. if the triggering conditions difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered. of fast handover is met for a period longer than or equal to the value of this parameter. a fast handover occurs only if the difference of path loss between a chain neighbor cell and the serving cell is greater than or equal to the value None of this parameter. no filtering is performed handover. the more This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the triggering conditions of fast handover are met. If this parameter 3G cell. the more This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. None None During the UL subcell to the OL subcell handover in the enhanced dualband network. if this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a too great value. but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a small value. If the number of received measurement This parameter can only be applied to the fast-moving reports is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter. a fast handover is triggered. the corresponding handover decision is triggered. in the UL subcell is increased. if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is. but the time delay is longer. The greater the value of this parameter is set. If this BSC receives the measurement reports of the serving cell from the BTS. and no fast handover decision is made. a load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell cannot be triggered. original serving cell after a successful fast handover. If this parameter is set to a too great value. This helps to parameter is set to a too small value. This parameter specifies the allowed number of invalid measurement reports when the BSC uses the measurement reports for filtering. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. During a measurement period. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this BSC receives the measurement reports of the adjacent cell from the BTS. the filtered value is avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report. the triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. if the compensated downlink level of the serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter. thus leading to This parameter specifies the duration of penalty that is performed on the original ping-pong handovers. If this During a measurement period. a fast handover is triggered. serving cell after a successful fast handover. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. if the MS moves at a speed greater than the value of this None parameter. inaccurate. the filtered value is avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report. According to the P/N criterion. The level values 0 to 127 map with -64 dB to 63 dB. None . Such a period is within the value defined by this parameter. is set to Preference for 3G Cell. the filtered This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the value is more accurate. If this parameter is set to a too great value. During a measurement period. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. thus leading to This parameter specifies the penalty that is performed on the downlink level of the ping-pong handovers. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. the filtered This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the value is more accurate. the traffic load the traffic load in the OL subcell is higher than the Inner Cell Serious Overload Threshold. This helps to parameter is set to a too small value. if the filtered uplink level of the serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter. The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. the BSC first selects the target This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a handover cell from the 2G candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a small value. inaccurate. The greater the value of this parameter is set.

Subcell Lower Load Threshold. all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. no handover can be triggered within the period defined by this parameter. After a handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell is successful. For the enhanced dualband handover algorithm. the corresponding handover decision is triggered. If this parameter is set to a too small value. None None This parameter specifies the level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell.Distance Hysterisis Between Boudaries of This parameter is a relative value. Thus. If this parameter is set to a too great value. Suppose the signal strength of serving cell is SS(s) and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). the system flow value of this parameter per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO load is increased. Thus. the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. adversely affected. the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Step length of UL subcell load HO(dB) per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period. congestion may This parameter specifies whether the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is enabled. the more difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be triggered. the system flow load is increased. the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. The decision condition for a handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is as follows: SS(s) . this parameter should be decided before the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. which specifies the size of blank zone between the UL subcell and the OL subcell. The greater the value of this parameter is set. None If the traffic load of the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell serious overload threshold. . If the flow control level in the current system is greater than the value of this parameter.SS(n) < Distance between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells . congestion may occur in the target To prevent ping-pong handovers. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. the system flow load is increased. period. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the UL subcell general overload threshold. The greater the value of this parameter is. This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the larger the blank zone is. If this parameter is set to a too great or too low value. thus speeding up the load handover.According to the P/N criterion. the more difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be triggered. This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. the system flow In Enhanced dualband If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is lower than the UL load is increased. load the handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell due to low or high UL subcell balancing between the OL subcell and UL subcell is load is not allowed. the boundaries of the OL and UL subcells are determined according to the relative value between the signal strength of None If this parameter is set to a too small value. The greater the value of this parameter is set. the handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the If this parameter is set to a too great value. if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. If this parameter is set to a too great value.

the MS that sends the channel request message in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. the MS that sends the channel request message in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. In an enhanced dualband cell. the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. According to the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion. The greater the value of this parameter is set. The greater the value of this parameter is set. the more difficult for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier for the BSC to hand over the MS to an FDD 3G cell. None . The level values 0 to 49 map to -24 dB to 0 dB. If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell. some calls of the UL subcell is handed over to the OL subcell. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. the 3G cell handover is preferred. some calls of the OL subcell is handed over to the UL subcell. Moreover. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10. If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes. the BSC This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the UL subcell None to the OL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm. Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes. This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR HR voice service. Otherwise. the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. This parameter specifies whether the channel request in the OL subcell is preferentially processed over the channel request the UL subcell according to the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. the more met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70. difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the MS access to the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell general overload threshold. a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the Ec/No of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are The greater the value of this parameter is set. a 3G better cell handover is triggered. None None If this parameter is set to a too great value. the 2G cell handover is preferred. No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden. If this parameter is set to a too small value. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. The greater the value of this parameter is. Moreover. the MS access to the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. the more met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. cells.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). If this parameter is set to a too small value. if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are The greater the value of this parameter is set. the BSC This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a first selects the target handover cell from the 2G candidate 3G cell. This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the OL subcell None to the UL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm. a 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter specifies whether the access request in the UL subcell is preferentially processed over the access request in OL subcell according to the UL subcell general overload threshold. If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold. During the handover decision: If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell. if TCH seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter. This parameter must be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is applied.

If this parameter is set to a too small value. If the call is in the OL subcell and if the OL to UL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed. handover penalty is not performed on the OL subcell to the UL subcell handover. the call cannot be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. the UL imposed. If handover penalty is enabled. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10. no the BSC determines whether the number of handover failures reaches the MaxRetry penalty related to retry times after UtoO handover failure is Time after UtoO Fail. . None If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell. all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. When multiple requests for the UL-to-OL handover are sent simultaneously. the traffic load If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to a too great value. This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes. the call can still be handed over to the subcell to OL subcell handover is prohibited during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. previous target cell after the penalty time. the traffic load in the UL subcell is heavy. the calls in the cell are handed over to the target cell by level. That is. If the number reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail. the calls with higher receive level can be handed over to the OL subcell first. when a call is handed over from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. When this parameter is set to Yes. the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Modified step length of UL load HO period per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period. Otherwise. Therefore. None This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes. some calls in the OL subcell are handed over to the UL subcell. After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover fails. the hierarchy handover algorithm is adopted to hand over the calls with higher RX level from the UL subcell to OL subcell. the calls are hierarchically handled from level 63 to 0. If this parameter is set to 0. If this parameter is set to a too great value. After a UL subcell to OL subcell handover fails. thus speeding up the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. None This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell.This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR FR voice service. the call cannot be handed over from the None OL subcell to the UL subcell during the Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail. During the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. TA Threshold. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is higher than the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold. and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic. The handover strip is decreased by Underlay HO Step Level every Underlay HO Step Period. the traffic load If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter. This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by UtoO HO Received Level Threshold. OtoU HO Received Level Threshold. it cannot be handed over back to the OL subcell during Penalty Time of UtoO HO to avoid ping-pong handovers. When the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail is set to 0. This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. the traffic load in the UL subcell is heavy. and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic. in the OL subcell is increased. congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70. This does not conform to the principle that the call of the best quality should be handed over preferentially. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm. in the UL subcell is increased. some calls in the UL subcell are handed over to the OL subcell. This parameter must be set to a value that is greater than or equal to the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold. calls with lower level may be handed over first. and TA Hysteresis. The value of this parameter is the time This parameter determines whether the traffic load in the UL subcell determines the UL subcell to OL subcell handover or the OL subcell to UL subcell handover in an enhanced concentric cell. Thus. Therefore. When deciding whether a call can be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. RX_QUAL Threshold.

RX_QUAL Threshold. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. Assign Optimum Layer is set to Underlaid Subcell.. For a dual-band network (for example. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by OtoU HO Received Level Threshold. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No. the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on the result of comparing the receive level on the SDCCH and AssignIf the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization. the TCH in the OL subcell cannot be assigned preferentially to the MS because no TA is lower than this threshold. In a concentric cell. and TA Hysteresis. the recommended value of this parameter is Underlaid Subcell. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold. RX_LEV Hysteresis. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors. TA Threshold. The greater the value of this parameter is set. the more difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors. RX_QUAL Threshold. TA Threshold. Overlaid Subcell: The TCH in the OL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to No. For the network with a single frequency band. and TA Hysteresis. No Preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment In a concentric cell. a concentric cell handover is triggered. RX_LEV Hysteresis. This parameter specifies whether a channel is assigned based on the access_delay in the channel request message during an immediate assignment. According to the P/N criterion. RX_LEV Hysteresis. the current receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. is set to 0. TA Threshold. 900/1800 MHz cells). If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. and determines the preferred service layer. In this case. According to the P/N criterion. Otherwise. and TA Hysteresis. UtoO HO Received Level Threshold. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel If the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization. None None The greater the value of this parameter is set. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold. an intra-BSC incoming cell handover request can be processed in one of the following modes: System Optimization: The measurement level on the BCCH of the target cell is added to the intra-BSC inter-cell handover request messages. Then. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned. If TA Pref. a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. the BSC compares the measurement value with RX_LEV Threshold. a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned. When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis. the channel assignment for an incoming-BSC handover can be processed in one of the following modes: Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned. the TCH can be assigned in the following modes: System Optimization: Based on the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. #N/A One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell. and TA Threshold. Then. RX_LEV Threshold. a channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. the BSC determines which service layer should be preferentially selected. the more difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered. incoming BSC handovers occur None None None When TA Threshold of Assignment Pref.This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell. the current receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. RX_QUAL Threshold. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel request message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. . If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No. Then. a concentric cell handover is triggered. inter-BSC handovers are triggered at the edge of two adjacent cells. RX_QUAL Threshold = RQ (ranging from level 0 to level 7) x 10. Therefore. if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. #N/A None Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. If TA Pref. Underlaid Subcell: The TCH in the UL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS. RX_QUAL Threshold. If TA Pref. the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on the result of comparing the uplink receive level on the SDCCH and In a concentric cell.

If this parameter is set to a too small value. None This parameter specifies the load threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover from a TCH to a BCCH. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed UO Signal Intensity Difference = UO Amplifier Power Difference + Combiner Insertion Loss Difference + Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas + Pass Loss Difference of Different Frequencies. This parameter affects the ranking of candidate cells. increasing the transmit power of the MS. This parameter specifies the expected uplink receive level on a new channel after an MS is handed over to a new cell. This parameter specifies the K offset used in K ranking. None Subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors. Measure the receive level of the UL subcell and OL subcell at several different places if the UL subcell and OL subcell use different antennas. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold. Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. the load of the non-BCCH frequencies should be higher None than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO. If an MS is moving fast. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover. This parameter is used for the MS Power Prediction after HO. Micro. TA Threshold. the downlink receive quality should be lower than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. you are advised to subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle. the BSC performs penalty on the adjacent cells of the cell where the MS is located. or Pico layer other than the Umbrella layer. Only when the MS is located at the Umbrella layer and the adjacent cells are located at the Macro. penalty is performed. it is set to 0. thus ensuring a relatively high uplink receive level on the new channel after handover. Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. None This parameter specifies whether the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is enabled. Penalty can be performed on only the cell that is not located at the fourth layer. determines the frequency of intra-cell handovers. This parameter specifies the signal quality threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To reduce the ping-pong effect in an handover. or None Pico layer. This parameter should be consistent with the UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold in Huawei II power control algorithm. This parameter is valid within only the Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO. This parameter specifies the penalty value. and avoiding This parameter specifies the period in which penalty is performed on the adjacent cells of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. RX_LEV Hysteresis. None This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive quality is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover. The recommended number of This parameter specifies whether the TA is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover. When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No. None This parameter specifies whether the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is enabled. The two intra-cell handovers that occur during the period specified by this parameter are regarded as consecutive handovers. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors. Micro. This parameter. Generally. RX_QUAL Threshold. call drop may easily occur. and TA Hysteresis. together with Forbidden time after MAX Times. The adjacent cells must be located at the Macro. None This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive level is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover. .

call drops may occur due to traffic time. the smaller the value of this parameter is (the required velocity is higher). if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells. . Load HO Threshold should be set to 85. the load on the system is increased. if this In hierarchical load handover. the more difficult BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. triggered. the system traffic volume cannot be reduced effectively. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If the interval of two continuous intra-cell handovers is shorter than a specified threshold. the handover time of congestion in the cell. Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth) are handed off the current serving cell. the greater than the value of this parameter. greater than the value of this parameter. System flux thresholds correspond to the system flux obtained based on message packets. The setting of this parameter affects the load handover targeted to the cell. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of the load handover. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. the load handover is triggered when the ratio of TCHs occupied in a cell reaches the threshold defined for load handover. If it is set to a too small value. Threshold. Intra-cell handovers are allowed only when the timer expires. The setting of this parameter is dependent on the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold parameter. The traffic load of a cell refers to the TCH seizure rate in the cell. the two handovers are regarded as consecutive handovers. if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells. The setting of this parameter determines the maximum Only when the receive level of the serving cell is within the range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV width of the handover strip during load handover. When Load HO Allowed is set to Yes. range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. for a certain period. the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. The more the micro cells are configured. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. is used for the BSC to control the number of users to be handed over by levels. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too greater value. If it is set to a too small value. the MS is regarded as moving slow. The time threshold is calculated based on the cell radius (r) and the velocity (v).When the number of consecutive intra-cell handovers reaches the maximum allowed. If multiple consecutive intra-cell handovers occur. starting from the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. If it is set to a lower value. the the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the cell load is smaller than the value of this parameter. the hierarchical handover algorithm for load handover each level is long. the handover strip increases by one Load HO Step Level for every Load HO Step Period. The value of this parameter should not be set too high. the more difficult According to the P/N criterion. corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. When the cell radius is fixed. If it is set to a lower value. In some cases. a This parameter to used to disable the intra-cell handover timer is started to forbid the intra-cell handover. is greater than the value of this parameter. The load handover is triggered when the traffic load in a cell is greater than the value of this parameter. Therefore. Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth). CPU load. The system flux level is the current flux control level of the system. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value. Where. the cell rejects the MSs handed over from other cells. the more the difficult fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered. the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. the The more the micro cells are configured. a load handover is allowed. Load handover is allowed only when the system flow is lower than the setting of this parameter. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS handover of AMR HR calls. 0 indicates the lowest level and 11 indicates the highest level. the cell can receive the MSs handed over from other cells. all the calls served by the cell may send handover requests simultaneously. Otherwise. If this parameter is set to a too great value. if this parameter is set to a too great value. the MS is regarded as moving fast. This parameter the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. the intra-cell handover may not be timely. This parameter determines the maximum number of consecutive intra-cell handovers allowed. The threshold equals 2r/v. 0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. The The setting of this parameter affects the width of the handovers are performed as such until all the calls whose receive levels are within the handover strip during load handover. and the load on the CPU The setting of this parameter affects the load handover will increase rapidly as a consequence. This parameter triggered. the number of handover requests that are rejected increases. the number of load handovers increases. When the load of the cell is equal to or greater than the Load HO Threshold. If the time taken by an MS to pass a cell is smaller than this threshold. uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. Otherwise. Otherwise. According to the P/N criterion. the intra-cell handover is forbidden for a period. In other words. and FID queuing load. the system resources may be wasted when intra-cell handovers occur frequently.

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the is greater than the value of this parameter. downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. This parameter specifies the quality level offset of the interface handover of the AMR FR service relative to non-AMR services or the AMR HR service (x 10). When determining whether an interference handover should be triggered, the system compares the receive quality of the MS minus the RXLEVOff with the handover threshold. For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference If the receive level of the serving cell is greater than or equal to 63, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a small value. This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 59 to 62, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 56 to 58, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 53 to 55, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 49 to 52, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 46 to 48, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 42 to 45, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 39 to 41, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 36 to 38, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 32 to 35, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is 31, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.

If the number of consecutive measurement reports without If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement the downlink measurement report is greater than the value report is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, the handover decision of this parameter, the handover decision related to no related to no downlink measurement report is allowed. downlink measurement report is not performed. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a lower value, the no downlink If the downlink MRs are not included in the MRs received, and if the uplink receive The handover decision is allowed only when the uplink quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, a no downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this measurement report emergency handover is triggered. parameter. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a higher When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover is preferentially value, the no downlink measurement report handover selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available cannot be triggered. This parameter is used to control the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm. If this parameter is set to 0, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm is This parameter is set according to the traffic volume. disabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is not allowed in this cell. This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. This parameter indicate specifies the drop trend of the receive level within a period. If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level drop is required for drop is required for triggering a rapid level drop handover. triggering a rapid level drop handover. This parameter is used together with the Filter Parameters A1 to A8. This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the greater than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold. uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold. downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell

An emergency handover is triggered when TA is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. This parameter is used as a switch to control the value determination method of measurement reports. When this parameter is set to Open, if DTX is used, the SUB values in the MR should be selected. Otherwise, the PULL values in the MR should be selected. This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to data configuration.

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to the Um interface error.

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to cell congestion. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK. By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the SDCCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK. By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter specifies the penalty time for AMR full rate to half rate (FR-to-HR) handovers. Before the timer expires, no AMR FR-to-HR handover is allowed if the previous FR-to-HR handover fails due to channel unavailability or channel mismatch. The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHFH HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the TCH REP_QUANT. By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.

This parameter determines the cell coverage for the TA emergency handover. In the areas with small space between BTSs and densely distributed BTSs, the coverage of the cell can be reduced if this parameter is set to a lower value. When this parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement report indicates that DTX is not used, the FULLSET values should be selected. When this parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement report indicates that DTX is used, the SUBSET values should be selected. In latter cases, the If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified.

When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH REP_QUANT. SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding duration for the MS. the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this averaging the CV_BEP on the TCH. parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. modified. This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for This parameter should be set to a small value because the averaging the CV_BEP on the SDCCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this averaging the MEAN_BEP on the TCH. parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. modified. This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for This parameter should be set to a small value because the averaging the MEAN_BEP on the SDCCH. SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding duration for the MS. the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.

Thus. If the preprocessed MR is sent at a high frequency. and the system response is delayed. 110 dBm to -47 dBm. When this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH.5 second. all previous measurement reports are discarded and the handover may fail. During the penalty time. This parameter is valid only within the Penalty Time after TA HO.This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original serving cell after an emergency handover due to timing advance is performed. This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost during interpolation. The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. After an emergency handover is performed due to bad quality. A penalty level is imposed on a target cell to avoid further attempts when a handover fails due to any of the following reasons: cell congestion. this adjacent cell can be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. the network performance is degraded. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. other cells are given higher priority This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original cell where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. This parameter should be set on the basis of the data rate and flow on the Abis interface. the flow on the Abis interface is increased. If this parameter is set to a lower value. . When this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. If this parameter is set to a higher value. After preprocessing the MRs. When this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter specifies the degree of penalty imposed on the original serving cell where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. This parameter is defined to avoid ping-pong handover and is valid only within the Penalty Time after BQ HO. If this parameter is set to a lower value. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the timing advance. Thus. thus leading to ping-pong handovers. the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. If this parameter is set to a lower value. For example. If the receive If the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than or level of an adjacent cell is greater than the value of this parameter. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. This parameter specifies the frequency at which the BTS sends the preprocessed MR to the BSC. a message indicating When this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighbor cells. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. Huawei This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the channel quality on the SDCCH. and the system response is delayed. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. Thus. the receive level of the This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on the target cell. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength. the network performance is Measurement reports fail to be decoded correctly when the signal strength in the serving cell is poor. and the system response is delayed. The average TA value serves as the basis for handover decision. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a higher value. a message indicating internal handover refusal is received. After an emergency handover is performed due to TA. Thus. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. thus leading to ping-pong handovers. and the system response is delayed. the BTS sends the preprocessed MRs to the BSC. the BTS sends preprocessed MRs to the BSC every 0. the network performance is degraded. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. When the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of this parameter. The TA value in a single MR may be inaccurate. if this parameter is set to Twice every second. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. Therefore. After an emergency handover is performed due to TA. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a lower value. This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on a target cell. Thus. the adjacent cell can equal to the value of this parameter. thus leading to ping-pong handovers. This parameter is used to select the candidate cells during directed retry. Thus. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. thus leading to ping-pong handovers. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. the network performance is degraded. the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is equal to or smaller than the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to a higher value. Thus. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. You can set this parameter to average the TA value in multiple MRs. the linear interpolation processing of the lost MRs is performed according to two consecutive MRs that are lost. This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell penalty time. The level values 0 through 63 map to be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. This parameter specifies the penalty on the signal strength of the original serving cell to avoid ping-pong handovers after an emergency handover due to the timing advance. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell.

If the target cell is congested and an incoming cell handover fails. When the conditions for an emergency handover are met. When this parameter is set to NO. When this parameter is set to YES. the UL and DL balance measurement is affected if Transfer BS/MS Power Class is This parameter specifies whether the BS/MS power class should be transferred from the set to No. This parameter determines whether transmit power is controlled by the BTS or by the BSC. This parameter specifies whether the BTS should send the original measurement report In 4:1 multiplexing mode. frequent handovers cannot be avoided. After the handover prohibition time for the initial access of an MS. 0: NO. parameter should be set to No. the handovers (such as PBGT BTS to the BSC. If this parameter is set to a too small value. and a subsequent handover is allowed only after the timer expires. This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive emergency handovers. frequent handovers cannot be avoided. and Sent Freq. a penalty is performed you need to disable the penalty for a certain handover. handovers cannot be performed timely. In this case. If this parameter is set to a too great value. on the target cell to avoid the handover of the MS to the cell. BCCH HO. If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side. handovers cannot be performed timely. This parameter is set to YES if power control is performed by the BTS. According to the P/N criterion. This parameter specifies whether to penalize the target cell where a handover fails or Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. No emergency handover is allowed during the minimum interval. This parameter should be set to Yes if the inter-BSC SDCCH handover is allowed. BCCH HO. if the load of a non-BCCH frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover. and concentric cell handovers) that require power compensation may fail. the MS can be handed over to another SDCCH in another BSC before a TCH is assigned. the BSC preprocesses the measurement reports. The parameter is used to avoid frequent handovers. specified by this parameter. specified by this parameter. set the related penalty time and penalty level to 0. In addition. The ATCB handover algorithm can determine the coverage areas of the OL subcell and the UL None subcell and balance the load between the OL subcell and the UL subcell and between the UL subcell and the adjacent subcell according to the actual networking. 1: YES None . but the network interference is reduced. Transfer BS/MS Power Class. the signaling on the Abis If this parameter is set to Yes. This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. This parameter is used to avoid unwanted handovers due to After a new SDCCH is assigned to an MS. handovers. you can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed This parameter can be used to avoid unwanted handovers After a new TCH is assigned to an MS. the MS can be handed over to another channel inaccurate measurement reports generated in the initial only if the time during which the MS occupies the SDCCH is longer than the period phase of call establishment. No handover is allowed during the minimum interval. If this parameter is set to a too small value. A timer starts after a handover is complete. the MS can be handed over to another channel due to inaccurate measurement reports in the initial phase only if the time during which the MS occupies the TCH is longer than the period of call establishment. then this the original MR to the BSC. the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. If the serving cell where the TA is too great or the signal quality is too bad. ping-pong handovers are likely to This parameter specifies whether to allow the inter-BSC SDCCH handover.of preprocessed MR parameters are invalid. This parameter specifies whether the BTS should preprocess MRs.When MR preprocessing is enabled. When the TA is great or the signal quality is bad. This parameter specifies whether the quick handover is enabled. an emergency handover timer is started. If this parameter is set to Yes. you can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed This parameter specifies the switch of the ATCB handover algorithm. the MS does not use the maximum transmit power. if the load of a non-BCCH frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the Transfer Original MR. load handovers. This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive handovers. and achieve the aggressive According to the P/N criterion. and thus the handover success rate is decreased. If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side. if there are more than two to the BSC. the BTS should send the preprocessed MR and timeslots configured in SDCCH/8 scheme. It can decrease the interference. the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. The value of this parameter is the length of the timer. improve the conversation quality. Another emergency handover decision can be made only when the timer expires. The purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality. This parameter is set to NO if power control is performed by the BSC.

if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. This parameter is used with the can be triggered. 1. The greater the value of this parameter is set. According to the P/N criterion. The AMR handover can be triggered only when the Intracell F-H HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes. a layered hierarchical The greater the value of this parameter is set. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. If this parameter is set to a too great value. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. This leads 1. an intra-cell half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH The lower the value of this parameter is set. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the number of candidate cells. When an AMR call occupies a half-rate TCH. Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum downlink power of the candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset) The M criterion is met if the Filtered uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of uplink receive level of the adjacent cell. The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of downlink receive level of an adjacent cell. difficult the AMR handover can be triggered. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. When this parameter is set to Yes. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the more When an AMR call occupies a full-rate TCH. an intra-cell full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH difficult the AMR full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains higher than the configured F2H HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used to avoid inter-layer ping-pong handovers. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. an unwanted cell may become the candidate cell. the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes. Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a serving cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold Inter-layer HO Hysteresis Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of an adjacent cell = configured Inter-layer HO This parameter is one bit of the 16 bits that are used by the BSC to sort the candidate cells for handovers. Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the number of candidate cells. According to the P/N criterion. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. That is. If the DL receive level of a cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. the more handover is triggered. This leads to None Note that in hierarchical handover and load handover. . The greater the value of this parameter is set. if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. an unwanted cell may become the target cell. If this parameter is set to a too small value. This parameter specifies the threshold of the full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover. The greater the value of this parameter is set. difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered. the more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered. This parameter specifies whether the AMR handover is enabled. the more The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. the more consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds. The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. the priority of the target cell must be higher than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N The greater the value of this parameter is set. if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. If this parameter is set to a too great value. a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell. According to the P/N criterion. the more difficult the AMR half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains lower than the configured H2F HO Threshold for a predefined period. a layered hierarchical The greater the value of this parameter is set. some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate cells. This parameter does not affect the dynamic non-AMR full-rate to half-rate handover. The triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO Threshold or the H2F HO This parameter determines the period during which the triggering conditions of the intracell full-rate to half-rate handover are met. difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered. Expected uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min Access Level Offset) The M criterion is met if the Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min DL This parameter specifies the hysteresis of an inter-layer or inter-priority handover. the more handover is triggered. some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate cells. Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time. a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell. According to the P/N criterion. the more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered. difficult the AMR handover can be triggered. This parameter is used with the can be triggered.This parameter specifies the threshold of the half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover. the cell is listed in the candidate cells based This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent None 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell. The greater the value of this parameter is set. That is. the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds.

The lower the hierarchy is. The greater the value of this parameter is set. an edge handover is triggered. According to the P/N criterion. The TA handover determines whether the timing advance (TA) is higher than the predefined TA threshold. A rise in BER may result from too low a signal level or channel interference. This parameter should be adjusted as required. According to the P/N criterion. The concentric cell handover can be classified into the UL subcell to OL subcell handover and the OL subcell to UL subcell handover. the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the This parameter specifies whether to enable the rapid level drop handover. If the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value. The cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. The concentric cell is used to achieve the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. cross coverage. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover threshold is not properly set. When an MS makes a call at the edge of a cell. The layered hierarchical handover cannot be triggered if the serving cell has the highest priority in the queue or if the level of the target cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. If the PBGT handover is enabled. In other words. The longer the distance is. To avoid such a call drop. the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered. If the DL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for a period. if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. Whether a BQ handover should be enabled depends on the UL and DL transmission quality (BER). This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm. the higher the priority is. cross coverage. This parameter specifies whether the concentric cell handover is enabled. the edge handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. The concentric cell handover can improve system capacity and conversation quality. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference. co-channel interference. calls are handed over to the cells with high priority (priority is related to Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority). if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. If the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value. a TA handover is triggered. The Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold If the UL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for a period. call drop may easily occur. the greater the TA value is. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. In other words. an The greater the value of this parameter is set. the higher the priority is. This parameter should be adjusted as required. if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. According to the P/N criterion. an edge handover can be performed. When the UL signal quality or the DL signal quality exceeds the BQ handover threshold. the edge handover algorithm is enabled. When this function is enabled. The TA is calculated based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. The greater the value of this parameter is set. if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover threshold is not properly set. The propagation loss of the 1800 MHz frequency band is greater than the propagation loss of the 900 MHz frequency band. an MS can be handed over to a new cell before the occurrence call drop caused by the rapid drop of the receive level of the MS. an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled. Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be enabled. Considering the preceding factors. the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered. This parameter specifies whether the time advance (TA) handover is enabled. The Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold This parameter specifies whether the interference handover is enabled. When the UL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold or the DL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold.According to the P/N criterion. the level drops rapidly due to multiple barriers. and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. None None None None Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. based on the layers and priorities. the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. When the TA is higher than the predefined TA threshold. and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The lower the layer is. an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered. a BQ emergency handover is performed. Cells are set to different layers and different priorities to implement the layered hierarchical handover. If the PBGT handover is enabled. The greater the value of this parameter is set. the call may drop if the receive level is too low. difficult the edge handover can be triggered. co-channel interference. When the receive level is higher the receive level threshold but the transmission quality is lower than the interference handover quality threshold. Based on the path loss. the interference handover is triggered. the more edge handover is triggered. In dual-band networking mode for densely populated urban areas. If the PBGT handover is enabled. This parameter specifies whether to enable the edge handover algorithm. the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered. call drop may easily occur. you can enable the . the MS is This parameter specifies whether the layered hierarchical handover is enabled. the MS is interfered and needs to be handed over. Then. the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. To avoid ping-pong handovers. This parameter specifies whether the bad quality (BQ) handover is enabled. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. the edge handover is triggered.

Note: A forced intracommon urban areas. 20. a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection. and balance the traffic load among cells. the target cell to which the MS is handed over may not be the cell with the best signal quality. When PT is set to 31. the number of handovers can be reduced and a better cell can be assigned to the MS. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs. the handover within the same BSC/MSC takes priority. the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed.08. suburbs. After the sequence is adjusted. such as 16. the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel. If this parameter is set to YES.02 and 05. speed circumstances When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled on the existing network. For details. Thus. The MS constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to following conditions: An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. 05. see GSM Rec. in the area with light traffic. This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled. see GSM Rec. the usage of radio resources drops. extra interference may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used. This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different LACs. a regular location update timer is defined. an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. It is invalid for cell reselection. For details. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer. the service performance is improved. that is. or 25. thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. thus improving the network performance. the larger the number of paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each paging sub-channel. If the value of this parameter increases. the number of paging sub-channels in a cell None None None The settings of RXLEV-ACCESS-MIN and CRO should guarantee that cells with same priority have the same cell reselect offset. If this parameter is set to a too small value. When necessary. Actually. 0408 and 0508. For details. No for highcell handover is not subject to this parameter. densely populated urban areas. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. If this parameter is properly configured. 05. in the area with heavy traffic. the MS re-calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). when the location update period decreases. this parameter determines the priority of cells.In addition. Generally. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of paging messages and reduce the . When the signaling traffic of the network increases. TO.08. This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs. If this parameter is set to 0. it becomes more difficult for an MS to access the cell when CRO increases. the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 This parameter specifies the manual correction of C2. In actual situation. see GSM Rec. If this parameter is set to Yes. see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. This parameter can prevent frequent location update. see GSM Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short). the MS power consumption increases. but a smaller value. it is The larger this parameter is set. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. This parameter specifies whether to adjust the sequence of candidate cells. The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system. In the VLR. This parameter Additional Reselect Param Indication (ACS) is used to inform an MS where cell reselection parameters can be obtained. The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion. and rural areas. and the average This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel. For details. When the location update period decreases. improve success rate of channel assignment. the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. 1: barred 0: allowed Together with CBA. This parameter specifies whether the intra-cell handover is enabled. such as 2 or 3. this parameter can be set to Yes. This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update. If this parameter is set to 1. The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. thus reducing the number of handovers. sent on the broadcast channel. indicates whether CRO. This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. If this parameter is set to Yes. The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection.In addition. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. For details.08 and 04. Yes for hot-spot areas. ping-pong location updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH It is recommended that you select a greater value. To properly specify the value of this parameter. the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed. 0508 and 0408. see GSM Rec. the CRO should be less than 25 dB because excessively large CRO may bring This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled. and PT are used. For details.This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 from other bytes of the system information type 4 message.

This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS. The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. The algorithm specifies three parameters: Tx-integer (T for short). thus affecting the access performance of the whole network. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If the TC resources are changed before and after the handover. Upon receipt of a CLEAR COMMAND message from the MSC. the BSC deactivates the channel. If this timer is set to a lower value. The increase in T and S prolongs the access time of an MS. If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1. For a common cell. this needs to keep the test duration for continuously transmitting the uplink data of the old channel.08. if the timer T3109 (AMRHR) expires. After the timer expires. This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected. The CBA function applies to special conditions. Therefore. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. this seizes the radio resources too much. This parameter specifies the number of timeslots between the consecutive transmissions of channel request messages by an MS. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. 04. If this timer is set to a lower value. the BSC deactivates the channel. this parameter is set to 10 ms. this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH. T should be set to a small value. if the timer T3109 expires.This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops. the timer is initiated when the ERROR INDICATION. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call drops. the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is initiated.08. After the CCCH is configured. the timer T3109 (AMRFR) stops. 04. In an intra-cell handover. This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. the MS reports the corresponding measurement report to the BTS. if the timer T3109 (AMRFR) expires. If this timer is set to a higher value. the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires. this parameter is set to 20 ms. For different cells in the same LAC. If this timer is set to a lower value. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). If this timer is set to a lower value. This parameter is an information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages. If this parameter is set to Yes. the outgoing BSC handover fails. When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRFR encoding mode. If this timer is set to a higher value. and influences the channel resource utilization. this may influence the handover success rate. maximum number of retransmissions (RET). If this timer is set to a higher value. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If bit N is This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA). this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections. only handovers are allowed in a cell. Together with CBQ. this may influence the call reestablishment success rate. network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off. . the BSC deactivates the channel. The BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST message after the timer expires. If TDM transmission is used on the Abis interface. the timer stops. the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is initiated. None None If this timer is set to a higher value. T should be set to a great value. Each bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. and S This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRFR) timer expires. If the timer expires. see GSM Rec. For details. The timer stops after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMPLETE message. When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRHR encoding mode. If this timer is set to a higher value. thus saving the network processing time and network resources. This condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. None The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the NCC. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed. To reduce the collisions on the RACH and to improve the efficiency of the RACH. Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed. their ATTs must be the same. the timer T3103C is initiated after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMMAND from target channel. the MS makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRHR) timer expires. For the call on the TCH in stable state. If this timer is set to a higher value. and RELEASE INDICATION messages are received. the timer T3109 (AMRHR) stops. If this timer is set to a higher value. This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance. and direct access of an MS is not allowed. this may influence the handover success rate. and the call reestablishment allowed is set to Yes for the cell where the call is. this parameter should be If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is small. this may increase the channel load and influence the access success rate. CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION. the BSC sends a handover failure message. If this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0. If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is large. if IP transmission is used on the Abis interface. After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message. an access algorithm is defined in GSM Rec.

Before the timer channel resources and cause the congestion. None This parameter specifies the maximum number of messages in the buffer of the cell None paging group packet when the Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface is turned on. If this timer is set to a lower value. If the timer expires. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. After the timer expires. If this timer is set to a lower value. If this timer is set to a lower value. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a higher value. this may influence the handover success rate. The BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0. If this timer is set to a lower value. In an outgoing BSC handover.5 second. . None Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable. this may influence the After the timer T3107 expires. T3101 is stopped. the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure. Qtru Signal Merge Switch The QTRU signal merge algorithm is to prevent the calls with great difference between uplink signal strengths from assigning in the same timeslot. the BSC sends a handover failure message. the timer T3103 is initiated after the BSC sends a handover command. after the BSC sends a handover request message. the BSC sends a handover failure message. If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a higher value. Before the timer T7 expires. assignment success rate. if the BSC receives the CC If this timer is set to a higher value. In an intra-BSC handover. If this timer is set to a lower value. the timer stops if the BSC receives a Handover Complete message. If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a higher value. The MS reports a Clear REQ message. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure message. the timer stops. this may influence the handover success rate. This parameter specifies the interval between two cell paging group packets. T3107 expires. the BSS releases channel resources and cause the congestion. the timer T7 is initiated. This parameter specifies the average number of paging messages that a cell is allowed to send within a statistical period. The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. After the timer T7 expires. which is an None integral multiple of 50 ms. the seized SDCCH channel. this may waste the After the BSC sends a handover command. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires. Before the timer T3103 expires. this may influence the immediate assignment success rate. The timer is initiated after the BSC sends the CR message. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. the BSS releases the seized SDCCH. None This parameter specifies whether a cell configured with baseband frequency hopping supports the intelligent power consumption decrease. this may influence the handover success rate. the timer T3107 is initiated. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot -the lowest uplink signal None None This parameter specifies the maximum number of paging messages that a cell is allowed None to send within a statistical period. if the timer expires. if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND message. the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. this may waste the message before the timer expires. Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable.This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover.

the call drops caused by no MRs for a long time for the MS are not contained in the statistics of call drops. the call drops caused by intra-cell handover timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by incoming-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. the paging messages are packaged according to cells. When the call drop counters are not optimized. When this parameter is set to Yes. If the paging message packaging timer is enabled. the call drops caused by this reason are None None None None None None None . 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by intra-BSC out-cell handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized. when the frequency scanning function is enabled. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. When this parameter is set to No. 1 specifies no optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. and mean values of the main and 0 specifies optimization. Main/Diversity: current. When the call drop counters are optimized. If this parameter is set to Yes. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell is out of service. the call drops caused by outgoing-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. assignment procedure can be used for all types of intra-cell handovers. maximum. None None This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services. minimum. This parameter specifies the scanning result type used from the start of a frequency scanning task to the reporting of a scanning result. whether interference band statistics algorithm I or interference band statistics None algorithm II. the BSC does not report a cell out-of-service alarm if This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services of low-level BTS for cascaded BTSs if the current-level sublink cannot be preempted. that is. the paging messages are packaged according to the CPU. the call drops caused by resource check are not contained in the statistics of call drops. None This parameter specifies which type of interference band statistics algorithm to use. 1 specifies no optimization. None This parameter specifies whether the MS can be handed over to another channel The assignment procedure can reduce the duration of intrathrough assignment procedure in intra-cell handover. When the call drop counters are optimized. The scanning result reflects the strength of frequency signals received by the cell. the cell handover. When the call drop counters are not optimized. When the call drop counters are optimized. otherwise. When the call drop counters are not optimized. None This parameter specifies whether the MS is forced to send a handover access message. This parameter specifies whether the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm after the cell is out of service. Frequency scanning refers to the scanning of uplink receive levels of cell frequencies. When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. When the call drop counters are not optimized.The cell paging message packaging is determined by the system load. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization.

if the parameter is set too large. otherwise. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by forced handover failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. In optimization. but also increase the total traffic volume of network. If the parameter is set too small. 1 specifies no optimization. the synchronous handover is performed. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized. The cell is unstable after initialization. When the call drop counters are not optimized. this parameter is used to specify a delay. the call drops caused by radio link failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are optimized. . a faulty main-BCCH might lead to delayed triggering of TRX aiding function after cell initialization. When the call drop counters are not optimized. When the call drop counters are optimized.0 specifies optimization. Not only the repeater can improve the base station coverage. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by OM intervention are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are optimized. 1 specifies no optimization. if the TRX aiding detection starts immediately after cell initialization. When the call drop counters are optimized. 1 specifies no optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized. This parameter specifies the delay of TRX aiding detection performed after the cell is initialized. When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the call drops caused by equipment fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops. 1 specifies no optimization. the connection failure message is sent by the BTS because the release indication message is sent or the waiting period of call reestablishment times out. The function of repeater is simpler than that of BTS. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by handover access failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. OM intervention. and radio resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are not optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the call drops caused by unsolicited DM response are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are optimized. 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the call drops caused by Abis territorial link fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops. the call drops caused by T200 timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are optimized. 1 specifies no optimization. therefore. and the repeater is an extended equipment that is used for the wide area or indoor application solving the problem of blind area. the call drops caused by sequence error are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are optimized. the call drops caused by this reason are This parameter specifies whether the repeater is configured in a cell. When the call drop counters are not optimized. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by radio resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops. handover access failure. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. the asynchronous handover is performed in intra-BSC handover. In such a case.the call drops caused by the reasons except for the radio link failure. None None None None None None None None None None None None If this parameter is set to Yes. a wrong decision might be made. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. When the call drop counters are not optimized. a wrong decision might be made in TRX aiding detection. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the call drops caused by this reason are not contained in the 0 specifies optimization.

This parameter is calculated according to the Included Angle and the actual Antenna Azimuth Angle. the BTS sends an If the value of this parameter is too small. It is recommended that the default value be used. Thus. downlink CCCH overload. the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. see GSM Rec. see GSM Rec.58. This parameter is contained in the Cell Options IE of the system information type 3 and 6 messages. 08. For the BSC increases. a wider bandwidth is occupied by services. None None If this parameter is set to a higher value. 05. the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service.This parameter specifies whether to allow flow control on the Abis interface. the system resource utilization decreases and MSs cannot access the network. the BTS frequently sends the overload messages to the BSC. This parameter specifies the priority of the PS low priority service. The parameter here is the value of the actual ActGene multiplied by 10 in fact.58. see GSM Rec. It is recommended that the default value be used.Included Angle/2 This parameter specifies the number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH load measurement. This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power level of MSs. The higher the value of this parameter is. Thus. As a result. It is one of the cell re-selection parameters in the system information type 3 message. . the BSC initiates cell flow control when receiving the RACH overload message from the BTS. It is recommended that the default value be used. Thus. some service requests are rejected or delayed so that the system load decreases. The value of this parameter indicates the interval during which the BSC determines whether an RACH timeslot is busy. Thus. control. When the resources are allocated in practice. the BTS periodically time. the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. For details. 08. When the BSS is congested. the BTS sends This parameter specifies whether to support the half-rate service in this cell. If the value of this parameter is too small. For details. None This parameter specifies the priority of the PS high priority service. This parameter specifies the priority of the CS voice service. Antenna Azimuth Angle = actual Antenna Azimuth Angle . If this parameter is set to a too small value. 08. the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. The higher the value of this parameter is. This parameter specifies the priority of the CS data service. None If the value of this parameter is too small. the receive level of the MS equals the measured receive level in FH minus the receive level obtained from the timeslots on the BCCH TRX. the BTS This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send the overload indication frequently reports overload indication messages to the BSC. This parameter is used to control the transmit power of MSs. If the value of this parameter is too details. If this parameter is set to a too great value. In a GSM900 cell. It is recommended that the default value be used. the BSC cannot process the exceptions in the BTS in If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the value of this parameter. the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service.58. the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. the load of the access requests on the RACH and the load of all the messages traffic on the Abis interface increases and thus the load of (such as paging messages and packet immediate assignment messages) on the PCH. see GSM Rec. If the value of this parameter is too great. It is one of None the cell reselection parameters in the system information type 3 message. the BSC frequently reports overload indication The overload causes include TRX processor overload. This parameter specifies the included angle formed by the major lobe azimuth of the antennas in two cells under one BTS. For details. the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 19. The Included Angle refers to the coverage area of the cell. The actual bandwidth assigned to a user is the value of multiplying the requested bandwidth by the ActGene. the BTS This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot. The higher the value of this parameter is. The higher the value of this parameter is. message to the BSC. great. the minimum receive level of MSs is increased to reduce RACH access requests. Thus. This parameter is imported with the requested bandwidth when the assignment request is sent. the total bandwidth is expanded by ten times. the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. and messages to the MSC and thus the MSC may initiate flow AGCH overload. the signaling that is. If the value of this parameter is too great.05. The flow control on the Abis interface is mainly used to balance the system load caused by Abis flow. The flow control function applies to the call management. the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. The major lobe azimuth is measured from the north to the direction of the cell antenna in a clockwise direction. That is. If this parameter is set to Yes.

It is used to synchronize the MS and the BTS after the BTS is re-initialized. 08.58. this parameter is used to compensate the difference of RSSI between the time the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed and the time the TMA is not installed. the BTS power reduces too much. Before the BTS sends the radio resource indication message to the BSC. The most significant bit indicates whether the parameter is valid.For details. 08. radio resource indication messages are reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased. the error is smaller. If the value of this parameter is too small. the BSC cannot handle the interference in the BTS in time. If the value of this parameter is too great. the interference levels on the idle channels in the period specified by this parameter are averaged. the error is small. and BTS3002C. None and reports the speed to the BSC through the uplink MR. This parameter specifies the maximum number of levels by which the BTS RF power decreases. The decrease in the BTS RF power is implemented through dynamic power control and static power control. RF resource status is not updated in time. If this parameter is set to a too small value. informing the BSC of the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX. this parameter is invalid. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level. According to the strength of interference signals. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. the averaging is performed too frequently and resources are wasted. This helps the BSC to assign channels.This parameter specifies the interval for sending the overload messages. If this parameter is set to a too small value. radio resource status is not immediately reported and thus the BSC cannot None This parameter is used for the fast-moving handover decision. This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. For details. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. Bits 14-8 indicate the level threshold. None None . the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. If this parameter is set to a too great value. If the value of this parameter is too small. In the radio resource indication message. the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The CCCH overload messages include the uplink RACH overload messages and the downlink PCH This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send radio resource indication messages. For the BTS2X. the error is small. If this parameter is set to a small value. The value of this parameter when the tower-mounted amplifier is not installed is 3 greater than that when the tower-mounted amplifier is installed. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. If this parameter is set to Yes. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals.58 and 08. None If this parameter is set to a great value. this parameter is invalid. RF resource status is reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error. This parameter specifies the start frame number of the BTS. If the value of this parameter is too great. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS. the FCH and SCH signals of adjacent cells do not appear in the same frame to facilitate the MS decoding.If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the CCCH Load Threshold. Bits 7-0 indicate the BER threshold. The frame offset technology arranges the frame numbers of different cells under the same BTS to be different from one another by one frame offset. an error is generated. an error is generated. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. the interference signals are classified None If this parameter is set to a small value. see GSM Rec. If this parameter is set to a too great value. The value of this parameter has 16 bits. The BTS adjusts the MS frequency according to the value of this parameter. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error. this parameter is shielded. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. the average result cannot reflect the change correctly. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. This parameter specifies the period during which interference levels are averaged. the BTS power reduces less and the power reduction effect is not good. This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. None For the BTS2X. Thus.08. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level. the BTS calculates the speed at which the MS moves towards or away from the BTS. the error is small. BTS3001C+. This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot. BTS3001C. Therefore. For the BTS2X.If the value of this parameter is greater. For other BTSs. see GSM Rec. this parameter is valid. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. The result is used to classify the interference levels on the idle channels into five interference bands. the TRX reports the interference level of each idle channel in the measurement period.

None This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 8. the BTS reports the VQI. This helps the BSC to assign channels. the receive quality gain will be obtained. None None If this parameter is set to StartUp. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. According to the strength of interference signals. This parameter specifies whether to permit the low noise amplifier (LNA) bypass. This prolongs the service time of the MS battery. This helps the BSC to assign channels. the BSC needs to consider this gain. the probability that the BTS transmits at full power increases. According to the strength of interference signals. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. however. the receive quality gain will be obtained.This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. None None None . the receive quality gain will be obtained. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. The None load of the cell is greater than or equal to the Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold. the VQI can be measured and reported. The interference increases. the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. is increased to some extent. The MS may fail to receive This parameter specifies whether the BTS reports the voice quality index (VQI). Before performing power control. the BTS transmit power is not adjusted during the handover to ensure the success of the handover. If this parameter is set to StartUp. the BSC needs to consider this gain. 0000000001: indicates that only the NT14. If the level is low. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. The RF connection supports the configuration of the main and diversity antennas. the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. In addition. 0000000100: indicates that only the NT6K data service is supported. For V9R3 and later. the receive quality gain will be obtained. the BTS transmit power is adjusted to the maximum before the BSC sends a handover command to the MS. and thus the speech quality is monitored. the discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) is introduced to the GSM. This helps the BSC to assign channels. Before performing power control. According to the strength of interference signals. a handover occurs. Before performing power control. The handover success rate. In this case. the BSC needs to consider this gain. For the BTS3002C. To reduce the power consumption. If this parameter is set to Report. if each cell is configured with two TRXs (O2 or S2). According to the strength of interference signals. the directed try procedure is started if the following two conditions are met: The cell supports the directed try procedure. The BSC measures the traffic on a per VQI basis. This parameter is configured for only the BTS3002C. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. The traffic related to AMR and non-AMR is measured separately. When the receive level of an MS drops rapidly. 0000000010: indicates that only the NT12K data service is supported. the BSC needs to consider this gain. The BSC that supports the DRX should send the dispatching message to MSs so that the This parameter specifies the data service supported. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 5. This parameter specifies whether to support DRX. Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted is set to Yes. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 6.5K data service is supported. the speech quality is good. the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. There are 11 levels of speech quality. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. The MS that supports the DRX consumes less power to receive broadcast messages that the MSs are interested in. the BSC cannot adjust the transmit power of the MS and BTS in time. the interference signals are classified None None None None If Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable is set to Yes. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 7. This value of the parameter can be set as required. Before performing power control. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs.

Before performing power control. Huawei III power control is performed. This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call. and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call. and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None . and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold. the BSC needs to consider this gain. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 3. Huawei III power control is performed. Huawei III power control is performed. Huawei III power control is performed. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 1. the receive quality gain will be obtained. None This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call. and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold. Huawei III power control is performed. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 2. the BSC needs to consider this gain. the BSC needs to consider this gain. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None None None None None This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC decreases the uplink transmit power. Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call.This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 4. the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control. Before performing power control. and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell.When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call. None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. Before performing power control. the receive quality gain will be obtained. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. Huawei III power control is performed. This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC increases the uplink transmit power. the receive quality gain will be obtained. and when the uplink receive None quality is lower than the threshold. the BSC needs to consider this gain.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step when the BSC increases the downlink power. None . and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None This parameter specifies the maximum allowed adjustment step when the BSC decreases the downlink transmit power. Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call. This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive quality exponential filtering formula. None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive quality. When the receive level is higher than the threshold.When the receive level is lower than the threshold. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call. None This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive level exponential filtering None formula.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm).The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm). Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call. None This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the uplink power control. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of uplink None receive level. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call. Huawei III power control is performed. Huawei III power control is performed. This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the uplink power control. Huawei III power control is performed. Huawei III power control is performed.

and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None When the receive level is higher than the threshold. Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the TCH in None a power control period.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm). This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the downlink power control. This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the downlink None power control. . the downlink power control is performed. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive quality. When the receive level is higher than the threshold. the downlink power control is performed. None This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive level exponential filtering formula. None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. None This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive quality exponential filtering formula. None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive level. None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. Huawei III power control is performed. Huawei III power control is performed. Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the SDCCH None in a power control period.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm).This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold.

If this parameter is set to a lower value. This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the quality zone 2 (the RQ value is greater than or equal to 3) based on the signal level.This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to this threshold. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. None This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands. None When the number of missing MRs in a power control period exceeds the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to a higher value. Level 0: BER smaller than 0. Bad UpLEVDiff. In the Huawei II power control algorithm. 1-2. then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. If this parameter is set to a higher value. Bad Trig Threshold. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. In the Huawei II power control algorithm. then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value of None DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. Bad Trig Threshold. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). None This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the None receive quality. This parameter specifies the maximum step length in decreasing the signal level in power control when the RQ is 0. None Bad UpLEVDiff. Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step. In downlink power control. if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to this threshold. This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the quality zone 1 (the RQ value is greater than 0 and less than 3) based on the signal level. Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% In uplink power control. This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the receive level. 1-2. if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to DL Qual. In the Huawei II power control algorithm. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. None This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS. In the uplink power control. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0.2% to 0. If this parameter is set to a lower value. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0. 1-2. if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to UL Qual.4% None This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the None receive quality. If this parameter is set to a lower value. then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power None control. If this parameter is set to a lower value. . In downlink power control. Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step. the dynamic power 0-16 (0 dB to 30 dB in steps of 2 dB) adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered. Bad UpLEVDiff. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control. the power control stops.

When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. and call drop may easily occur. When you configure this parameter. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. the quality is poor without power control. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the uplink level becomes high without power control. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. This parameter specifies the number of downlink measurement reports used for predicting the level in power control. and call drop may easily occur. When you configure this parameter. This parameter specifies the number of uplink measurement reports used for predicting the level in power control. the quality is good without power control. Thus. the quality is good without power control. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the battery life is reduced. In Huawei II power control algorithm. the uplink level becomes high without power control. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. thus the conversation quality is If this parameter is set to a too great value. In Huawei II power control algorithm. Instead. Thus. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Thus. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the conversation quality is degraded. the uplink level becomes low. Thus. power control is performed. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. power control is performed. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. the average filter value in the history measurement report is not used for power control decision. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the quality is good without power control. the uplink level becomes high without power control. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the stable state quality zone are set.When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. Thus. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. power control is performed. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the downlink level becomes low. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. the BSC or BTS puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. Thus. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. the uplink level becomes low. power control is performed. None None If this parameter is set to Yes. the prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment. Thus. and call drop may easily occur. Thus. This parameter determines the uplink quality upper threshold of the quality zone. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the uplink level becomes high without power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the quality is good without power control. Instead. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. the prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment. the conversation quality is degraded. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. the Huawei II power control algorithm puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. This parameter specifies whether the compensation of AMR measurement reports is allowed by Huawei II power control algorithm. When this parameter is set to Yes. the quality is poor without power control. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. When you configure this parameter. If this parameter is set to a too small value. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. If this parameter is set to a too small value. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the quality is poor without power control. Thus. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. and call drop may easily occur. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. the average filter value in the history measurement report is not used for power control decision. the quality is poor without power control. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment. If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control. . conversely. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. the downlink level becomes low. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. If this parameter is set to a too small value. thus the conversation quality is If this parameter is set to a too great value. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. the battery life is reduced. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. Thus.

A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the power control may be delayed. if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to a too great value. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control. the algorithm This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the cannot realize fast power control. then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL None Qual. then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL None Qual. None . When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level. the power adjustment is delayed. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. a too great value. Bad UpLEVDiff. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). 12. In downlink power control. thus wasting the resources. A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone.This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the AMR MS power adjustment. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level. After the BSC delivers the power control command. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ).Class 0 to class 15 corresponds to 0 dB to 30 dB. Bad Trig Threshold. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). If this parameter is set to a too great value. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. it should wait for a certain period before receiving an acknowledgement message. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed.2% None If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to receive level. In the uplink power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0. If this parameter is set to signal quality. If this parameter is set to a too small value. In Huawei II power control algorithm. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power control. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. In Huawei II power control algorithm. Level 0: BER smaller than 0. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value If this parameter is set to a too great value. Bad Trig Threshold. Bad UpLEVDiff. If this parameter is set to a too small value. 12. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too great value. with a step of 2 dB. the MR that power control decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during the power adjustment. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set 5. In downlink power control. if the downlink receive quality is higher than or equal to the DL Qual. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. Bad UpLEVDiff. if the uplink receive quality is higher than or equal to the UL Qual. the power control may be performed frequently. This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous AMR power control commands. 12. the algorithm This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the cannot realize fast power control. but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the BTS. the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value None of the DL Qual. then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff. a too great value. the power ranges from class 0 to class 4. Therefore. This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS. A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. When you configure this parameter. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed.2% In uplink power control. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level. Thus. This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the receive quality. the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. the dynamic power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered. In Huawei II power control algorithm.

it should wait for a certain period before receiving an acknowledgement message. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. . the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. Thus. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. the uplink level becomes high without power control. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value None If this parameter is set to a too great value. When you configure this parameter. If this parameter is set to a too small value. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. Thus. Thus. Thus. and call drop may easily occur. and call drop may easily occur. the BSC performs weighted filtering on the values of the receive level and of the receive quality in several history measurement reports. power control is performed. the signal quality of the MS is poor without power control. the quality is good without power control. the downlink level becomes low. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value. but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the MS. the uplink level becomes low. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. the MR that power control decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during the power adjustment. the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. If this parameter is set to a too small value. When determining whether to perform power control. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. Thus. and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. When you configure this parameter. the battery life is reduced. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. the battery life is reduced. Therefore. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the signal quality is good without power control. the quality is poor without power control. When you configure this parameter. When you configure this parameter. the quality is good without power control. the quality is poor without power control. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. Thus. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. Thus. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. the downlink level becomes low. power control is performed. the quality is poor without power control.After the BSC delivers the power control command. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. This parameter specifies whether enable Huawei II power control algorithm or Huawei III power control algorithm. power control is performed. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. the BSC or BTS puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. thus the conversation quality is If this parameter is set to a too great value. Thus. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. the conversation quality is degraded. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the battery life is reduced. This parameter specifies whether the compensation of measurement reports is allowed by Huawei II power control algorithm. Thus. The measurement reports may be obtained by the BTS/MS at This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the conversation quality is degraded. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. None If this parameter is set to Yes. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the power adjustment is delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Thus. the conversation quality is degraded. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. power control is performed. the quality is good without power control. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control. the uplink level becomes high without power control.

the proportion of the history value in the interference measurement results decreases. This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3105. thus increasing the . the tolerance of the network to downlink errors decreases and the probability of the frequent TBF release increases. the power control may be delayed. namely. the MS can use this TBF that automatically becomes active None If this parameter is set to a higher value. the network resets the N3105 when it receives the packet acknowledgment message from the MS on the uplink RLC data block corresponding to the RRBP field. When the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control. if this parameter is set to a lower value. After sending the last downlink RLC data block and confirming that all downlink data blocks are received. the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases. thus causing the useless signaling seizing the channel bandwidth and wasting the downlink resources. the multiple MSs can share one uplink channel if the downlink data blocks carry the USF value. This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the transfer mode. thus wasting the uplink resources. the power control may be performed frequently.The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. the network initiates the N3105. the influence of Cn1 on Cn increases. the uplink TBF frequently releases and establishes. Upon receiving the last RLC data block when the uplink transmission is complete. if this parameter is set to a lower value. if this parameter is set to a lower value. Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data blocks (CountValue=0) from the MS that supports the extended uplink TBF function. thus wasting the resources. which is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet idle mode. the tolerance of the network to uplink errors decreases and the probability of the frequent TBF release increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value. this parameter determines the reduced level of the MS transmit power mapping to the path loss. the uplink level becomes high without power control. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet transfer mode and calculates Cn of This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the packet idle mode. Upon setting the RRBP field in the downlink RLC data block. if this parameter is set to a lower value. the influence of Cn1 on Cn increases. the output power of the MS decreases. the output power of the MS increases. If this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter determines the expected receive signal strength on the BTS when the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a higher value. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Therefore. the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a lower value. this wastes the wireless resources and influences the the access performance of other MSs in the network. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. the release delay of the uplink TBF increases. To transmit the uplink RLC data blocks during inactive period. the release time of the uplink TBF delays due to no response of the MS caused If this parameter is set to a lower value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the N3101 is initiated. If this parameter is set to a lower value. Thus. The MS obtains valid measurement signals by sampling for NAVGI times. The MS uses the Alpha parameter to calculate the output power of the uplink PDCH. If this parameter is set to a higher value. If the network does not receive a packet control acknowledgment message within This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3101. keep this TBF unreleased by continuously resending the last downlink data block with the Relative This parameter specifies the inactive period of the extended uplink TBF. which is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet transfer mode. the network increases N3105 This parameter specifies the maximum value of the N3103. After the network starts to assign a USF value to the uplink TBF (uplink TBF is established). If this parameter is set to a higher value. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the abnormal uplink TBF release increases caused by the overflow of the N3103. This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the signal level in the packet transfer mode. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the network does not release this uplink TBF immediately but set it to the inactive mode. If this parameter is set to a higher value. otherwise. the uplink level becomes low. and call drop may easily occur. the abnormal TBF may occur (such as the MS has not received the message of If this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the signal level in the idle mode. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. None If this parameter is set to a lower value. the abnormal TBF may occur (such as the MS does not receive the message of If this parameter is set to a lower value. the network does not immediately notify the MS of releasing this TBF but forcedly set the last data block not received. This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands. PCH. This parameter specifies the constant of filtering the collision signal strength for power control. None This parameter specifies the channel where the receive power level of the MS is measured for the uplink power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value. This parameter is used for the open-loop power control. The network reserves the RLC uplink blocks mapping This parameter specifies the release delay of the downlink TBF. the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 and initiates the N3103. After a downlink TBF is established. This parameter specifies the reduced power of the BTS on the PBCCH. the proportion of the history value in the interference measurement results increases. In uplink dynamic assignment mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet idle mode and calculates Cn of the MS output This parameter specifies the initial power level.

To establish the downlink TBF on the unreleased uplink TBF. the probability of the cell reselection increases. the number of This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE 8PSK transmission quality. If this parameter is set to a lower value. if this parameter is set to a lower value. parameter is set to a lower value. MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold. the load-based reselection is triggered difficultly. the decision may not be performed immediately. the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases. This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive level of the serving cell is lower than the level threshold of cell reselection within the Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period. If the times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases. because the BSC6000 does not support the If this parameter is set to a higher value. the cell reselection is allowed. the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases. the weight of the previous signal level increases. you can infer that the transmission quality is worsened. the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases. and the If this parameter is set to a higher value. None This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or 3G cell is selected in the inter-RAT cell reselection procedure. This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive levels of the serving cell are continuously calculated before the P/N criterion is determined. the number of This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE GMSK transmission quality. If this parameter is set to a higher value. if this parameter is set to a higher value. None This parameter specifies whether enabling the cell load-based reselection algorithm is allowed. if this quality is worsened. the probability of the cell reselection decreases. the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing this uplink TBF. the number of cell reselections increases. This parameter is used to collect the statistics of GPRS transmission quality. if the MS needs to send new uplink data. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost exceeds this parameter. thus greatly reducing the downlink TBF establishment time. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the weight of current signal level increases. the network will notify the MS of releasing this uplink TBF for a period of delay after this parameter is set. Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data block (CountValue=0). the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases. you can infer that the transmission and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly. If the times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases. however. if this parameter is set to a lower value. This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost. None . and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly. if this parameter is set to a lower value. and the This parameter specifies the interval between two NC2 cell reselections in a cell. MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold. If the receive quality is equal to or greater than this threshold. If this parameter is set to a higher value. If the number of times is lower than this parameter. After This parameter specifies that the MS performs the load-based cell reselection can be controlled. The load-based cell reselection is available to the MSs that the receive level is lower than this threshold.This parameter specifies the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF. and the If this parameter is set to a higher value. the previous MR is thought to be invalid. if this parameter is set to a lower value. if this parameter is set to a lower value. parameter is set to a lower value. None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighbor cells. you can infer that the transmission and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly. If this parameter is set to a higher value. if this quality is worsened. This parameter specifies whether enabling the normal cell reselection algorithm is allowed. the number of cell reselections decreases. this can increase the probability of establishing the downlink TBF on the PACCH. If this parameter is set to a higher value. None This parameter specifies whether enabling the critical cell reselection algorithm is allowed. the precision of decision may be reduced. the load-based reselection is triggered easily.

it is difficult for the MS to reselect this cell.This parameter specifies that if the cell load is lower than this threshold. This parameter specifies that the Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed can be determined when the transmission quality in the received downlink transmission quality measurement report is lower than this threshold. the BSC reserves uplink resources for the BTS. target cell only if the target cell has a lower level. If this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies whether to support the QoS optimization. after the packet assignment is taken over to the BTS. This higher level. the uplink/downlink This parameter specifies the lower limit of the bandwidth for the POC services. conversely. This parameter specifies the policy of the handover between the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell in a PS domain. the uplink/downlink This parameter specifies whether to support the packet assignment. The load-based reselection is enabled when the cell load is higher than this threshold. The critical reselection needs to be performed when the ratio of the accumulatively reselection is triggered difficultly. the time greatly reduces. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. and throughput class. This parameter specifies that the accumulatively calculated number of times that the downlink transmission quality of MS is lower than the transmission quality threshold of If this parameter is set to a higher value. The QoS control parameters include the service priority class. If the service type carried in the received message is POC. the MS can be This parameter specifies the signal level for target cell penalty after the BSC receives the handed over to the target cell only if the target cell has a cell reselection failure message or after the cell initiates the load-based reselection. the access delay of the MS reduces. the critical MS. if this parameter is set to a lower value. the critical reselection is triggered easily. If this parameter is set to a higher value. this only involves the takeover of the uplink immediate assignment. The QoS level is determined in the subscription. when this parameter specifies the cell reselection. reliability class. if this parameter is set to a lower value. the MS can be handed over to the parameter is valid only within the Cell Penalty Last Time. delay class. that is. The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the cell will receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection if the TBF multiplexing rate is lower than corresponding percentage. To improve the speed of the MS to access the network. it is difficult to trigger the load-based reselection. The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. the critical reselection is triggered easily. and supports the handover between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell. if this parameter is set to a lower value. the underlaid-to-overlaid None None None When this parameter is set to Yes. if the overlaid voice services are congested. the critical reselection is triggered difficultly. if this parameter is set to a lower value. calculated number of times and the number of times in the downlink transmission quality measurement report reaches this threshold. the MS cannot be handed over to the target cell that the previous reselection fails or the load-based reselection occurs within the time longer than this value. If this parameter is set to a higher value. The GPRS GSN provides different subscribers with flexible QoS mechanism. If the service type carried in the received message is POC. This parameter specifies the penalty duration for the cell reselection. If the underlaid voice services are congested. The setting of this parameter is to avoid the ping-pong reselection between cells. conversely. This parameter specifies the maximum transmission delay of the POC services. The cell penalty can be performed within the Cell Penalty Last Time only. . In version V9R8. the Transfer Delay in the This parameter specifies the upper limit of the bandwidth for the POC services. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. If the service type carried in the received message is POC. That is. If the value of this parameter increases. the assignment of the packet channel to the MS through the PACCH. the cell can receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as None a candidate cell for handover. The BTS obtains the channel request information of the MS None This parameter is configured according to the congestion of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. the BSC supports the PDCH configured in the overlaid subcell or in the underlaid subcell. it is easier to trigger the load-based reselection. The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. the overlaid-tounderlaid subcell handover is only allowed. it is easier for the MS to reselect this cell. the level of the target cell should higher than the total of the Min Access Level Threshold and the Cell Reselection Hysterisis. To avoid ping-pong handovers.

None For the cell with the good Um interface quality. the smaller the proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is. This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4. for the cell with the poor Um interface quality. it is easy to decrease the CS type. set the parameter to MCS6. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value value. it is easy to decrease the CS type. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink. Gbr:guaranteed bit rate. . If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value value. the QoS parameters are obtained from the DL UNITDAT of the SGSN or from the uplink request of the MS. you should dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality. you should set this parameter to a value among MCS1-MCS9. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the BSS pre-allocates the uplink TBF resources and sends these resources to the BTS. set the parameter to MCS4. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. To improve the speed of the MS to access the network. the BTS uses the pre-allocated resources to send the immediate assignment When both the MS and the network support PFC. you should fixedly use an MCS type for all This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink. If this parameter is set to a modest value. When the MS or the network does not support PFC. of this parameter. None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3. None None None The higher the value of this parameter is. thus improving the quality of links. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the If this parameter is set to an excessive value. it is easy to downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS4. increase the CS type. increase the CS type. otherwise. To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink. Then. If this parameter is set to a modest value. It is relative to the uplink immediate assignment. the QoS parameters are obtained from the ABQP in the PFC. During the data transmission process. increase the CS type. When the MS initiates the channel request. This parameter can be used to obtain the forgetting factor. This parameter specifies the mode of controlling the quality of links. it is hard to decrease the CS type. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1. it is easy to downlink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the If this parameter is set to an excessive value. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. of this parameter. the access delay of the MS reduces. it is hard to increase the CS type. This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2. you should fixedly use an MCS type for all This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2. it is hard to increase the CS type. When this parameter is set to Yes. which is used for the MS to calculate the measurement results. you should set this parameter to UNFIXED. it is easy to downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS3. the larger the proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink. it is easy to decrease the CS type. Then. set this parameter to UNFIXED. To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink. To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink. you should set the MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS2 to CS1. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. it is hard to decrease the CS type. it is hard to increase the CS type. it is hard to decrease the CS type. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the If this parameter is set to an excessive value. . the modulation scheme and coding scheme can be changed to dynamically adapt to the radio transmission environment. you dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value value. of this parameter. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS1 to CS2. you should set the MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. you should set this parameter to a value among MCS1-MCS9.Setting and effect This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS2 to CS3. This parameter specifies the average period of bit error detected.This parameter specifies whether to support the takeover of the packet immediate assignment by the BTS.

it is hard to decrease the CS type. This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the uplink. Then. this parameter can be set to None CS1. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS2 to CS1. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. increase the CS type. it is easy to decrease the CS type. CS2. this parameter. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value. increase the CS type. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink. Then. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS2 to CS3. If this parameter is set to a modest value. or CS4. The background class service is a kind of traffic class services. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. CS3. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of value. it is easy to decrease the CS type. all TBFs use the default CS types. CS2. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. this parameter is set to UNFIXED. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP3. This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP2. None None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. it is hard to decrease the CS type. . or CS4. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. it is easy to TBF to change from CS3 to CS4. it is hard to increase the CS type. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3. If this parameter is set to a modest value. This parameter specifies the fixed coding scheme (CS) type used on the uplink. This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Traffic Handle Priority 1 (THP1). it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value. This parameter specifies the weight of QoS background services. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. it is hard to decrease the CS type. To dynamically adjust the CS type on the uplink. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. this parameter. To dynamically adjust the CS type on the downlink. this parameter can be set to CS1. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of value. this parameter is set to UNFIXED. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3.This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the downlink. it is easy to TBF to change from CS2 to CS3. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. all TBFs use the default CS This parameter specifies the fixed CS type used on the downlink. If this parameter is set to a modest value. it is hard to increase the CS type. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink If this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink If this parameter is set to an excessive value. If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the downlink. the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission quality. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. If this parameter is set to a modest value. it is easy to increase the CS type. CS3. If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the uplink. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS1 to CS2. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. set the CS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. set the CS type for transmitting the None first TBF through this parameter. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission quality. If this parameter is set to a modest value. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. it is hard to increase the CS type.

and the If this parameter is set to a lower value. the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer. there are This parameter specifies the maximum ratio of PDCHs in a cell. All dynamic channels can be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all the dynamic channels. If this threshold is set to a higher value. If this parameter is set to a modest value. The uplink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs. and the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher If this threshold is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies the PDCH downlink multiplex threshold. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. dynamic channels are used. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. Before the timer expires. static PDCHs). This parameter specifies the downlink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion. channels. the Abis timeslots may be applied frequently. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. Control channels cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all This parameter specifies the timer set to release the idle dynamic channel after all TBFs on the dynamic channel are released. Only full-rate TCHs are the dynamic channels that can be preempted. the dynamic channel resources may be wasted when there are no services for a long time. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the dynamic channel is not released immediately. If this parameter is set to a modest value. When a channel is idle. this timer is started. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. if there are new services. insufficient PDCHs and excessive TCHs. Value range: Reporting the frequencies of six strongest cells. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. Instead. it is easy to seize dynamic channels. Reporting the frequency of None one strongest cell. This parameter specifies the uplink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion. If this threshold is low. This parameter specifies the levels of dynamic channels preempted by CS services and PS services. None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. When the timer expires. If this parameter is set to a modest value. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value. This affects PS This parameter specifies the multi-frequency reporting value. the PS services are affected. a timer is started when the channel is idle. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the dynamic channel continues to be This parameter specifies the policy for dynamic channel conversion in a concentric cell. dynamic channels are used. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. there are of TCHs + PDCHs. it is difficult to seize dynamic When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10. and the uplink If this threshold is high. The downlink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs. the CS services are affected when there are too many PS services. This parameter determines the proportion of PDCHs to the total number If this parameter is set to a modest value. If the UL voice service is congested. This parameter specifies the PDCH uplink multiplex threshold. the Abis timeslots are released. it is easy to seize dynamic channels.This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP3. it is difficult to seize dynamic channels. and the downlink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher. If this parameter is set to a modest value. Reporting the frequencies of three strongest cells . This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP2. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. This parameter specifies the number of channels reserved for the CS services. If this threshold is high. If this threshold is low. Reporting the frequencies of two strongest cells. This affects CS TCHs and PDCHs available in a cell is fixed. the idle Abis timeslots cannot be fully used. This parameter specifies the timer set to release the Abis timeslots. The total number of excessive PDCHs and insufficient TCHs. This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Allocation/Retention Priority 1 (ARP1). The PDCH ratio is equal to PDCHs / (TCH/Fs + services. If all TBFs on a dynamic channel are released. the dynamic channel is converted at the UL cell. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10. the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more. it is possible that a dynamic channel is requested immediately after being This parameter is configured according to the congestion counter of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more. the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer. If this parameter is set to a lower value. If this parameter is set to an excessive value.

c31standard: applied c31notuse: not applied This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in the same routing area. The frequent cell This parameter specifies whether the PSI status message is supported. This parameter specifies the period when cell reselection is prohibited. Value range: 0. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the period when cell reselection is prohibited decreases. the period when cell reselection is prohibited increases. it is easy for the MS to select this cell during cell reselection. if this parameter is set to an excessive value. the coverage area of the cell is large. The usage of cell resources decreases. it is easy for the cell to be selected. This parameter specifies whether the MS can access another cell. If this parameter is set to a modest value. The MS on the edge of the cell may not be able to access the system. which is used for cell reselection. if the originating cell and the target cell belong to the same routing area. the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs. This parameter specifies whether the SoLSA exclusive access cell is used. Permit Cell Access: Access is permitted. When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection. If the threshold of HCS signal strength is high. This parameter specifies whether the cell can be accessed during cell reselection. it is hard for cell reselection. Yes: The MS can access another cell. When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection. Value 0 indicates the lowest priority and value 7 indicates the highest priority. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. if the originating cell and the target cell belong to different routing areas. and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to a modest value. No: The MS cannot access another cell. None . This parameter specifies the maximum TX power level for an MS to access the packet control channel. The MS uses the signal strength in the MR and this threshold to calculate C31. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the MS may not be able to access the channel. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level for an MS in the cell to access the system. the C2 value measured in the overlapped area of two adjacent cells fluctuates greatly because of the fading feature of radio channels. This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in different routing areas. Only the MSs customizing the Localised Service Area (LSA) service can access the exclusive cell. If the priority is high. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs. the MS frequently performs cell reselection. This parameter specifies whether GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. If this parameter is set to a modest value. it is difficult for the MS to select this cell during cell reselection. Therefore. the coverage area of the cell is small. Prohibit Cell Access: Access is prohibited. the MS starts cell reselection only when the signal level of the neighbor cells in different routing areas is higher than that of this cell. the power consumption and radiation of the MS are high. None This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to send a measurement report to the network. if this parameter is set to an excessive value. it is difficult for the cell to be selected. This parameter specifies whether GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis is applied to the C31 standards.This parameter specifies the threshold of HCS signal strength. 1: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. it is hard for cell reselection. If the priority is low. Yes: supported No: not supported None None None In the same routing area. None In different routing areas. None This parameter specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) priority of a GPRS cell. 1 0: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is not used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. If the threshold of HCS signal strength is low.

. the MS cannot access the cell. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 3.. and level 4 is the lowest priority. it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. . This parameter specifies the persistence level 1 of radio priority access. it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore. However. If this parameter is set to a modest value. Level 1 is the highest priority. If the priority is higher than the persistence level. the MS sends a If this parameter is set to an excessive value. None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. Therefore. Otherwise. None None None . it is easy for an MS to access the cell. This parameter affects the interval for the MS to send a new Channel Request after the channel request fails. too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. the MS can access the cell.. Level 1 is the highest priority. the MS can access the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level. However.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Otherwise. radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to a modest value. Level 1 is the highest priority. the MS cannot access the cell. However. This parameter specifies the persistence level 2 of radio priority access. radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. Value 2 indicates two PAGCHs. This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. This parameter specifies the number of timeslots for extension transmission in random access. it is easy for an MS to access the cell. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 1. This occupies many resources. it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Value 1 indicates one PRACH. it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. This may affect MS services. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 2. it is possible that a response is sent. radio resources may be wasted. This parameter specifies the persistence level 3 of radio priority access.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities.. it is easy for an MS to access the cell. and level 4 is the lowest priority. If this parameter is set to a modest value. too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value. and level 4 is the lowest priority. thus reducing access collisions but slowing down the MS access speed. the PSI1 cannot be received in real time. If this parameter is set to a modest value. Otherwise. If this parameter is set to a modest value. If the priority is higher than the persistence level. the PSI1 is sent frequently. The MS sends an access request and waits for a response. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. the MS sends a new Channel Request within a long interval after the channel request fails. the MS cannot access the cell. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 4. If the priority is higher than the persistence level. However. Level 1 is the highest priority. too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the MS needs to wait for a long time before sending the next request. too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. Value 2 indicates two PRACHs. Therefore. and level 4 is the lowest priority.. If this parameter is set to a modest value.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. the MS can access the cell. If this parameter is set to a modest value. This parameter specifies the number of PAGCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. Otherwise. radio resources may be wasted. This parameter specifies the minimum number of timeslots between two successive channel requests. This parameter specifies the persistence level 4 of radio priority access. the MS cannot access the cell.This parameter specifies the repetition period of the PS information PSI1. it is easy for an MS to access the cell. If no response is received after the minimum number of timeslots. Value 1 indicates one PAGCH. Therefore. the MS resends the access request.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. the MS can access the cell. but the MS has not received it because None None None None This parameter specifies the access control class.

The timer is sent this parameter should be set to a high value when the through the system message broadcast in each cell. Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs. Yes: The MS can receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service. This parameter can be set to em0 or em1. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. measurement report is sent frequently. This parameter specifies the NCC bitmap of the measurement report sent by the MS. The principles of cell reselection offset are as follows: 1. Therefore. 2 For the cell with medium traffic. Yes: supported No: not supported None None None When this parameter is set to Yes. When the MS is in idle mode. The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time This parameter specifies the minimum duration when the MS stays in non-DRX mode after the measurement report is sent. If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell. This parameter specifies the interval between two extension measurement reports. measurement information is not obtained timely. When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS. some information may be missing. This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. and type 3. This occupies many bandwidth resources. measurement report is sent frequently. . the access delay of the EGPRS MS is shortened. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. The measurement report should contain the received signal level and BSIC. the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time. The MS reports only the NCC bitmap of the BSIC and the carrier measurement report that matches the bitmap. affected. This parameter specifies the type of the extension measurement report Three types of the extension measurement report are type 1. No: The MS cannot receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service. This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet If this parameter is set to a modest value. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the MS may The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after the measurement report stay in non-DRX mode for a long time and services may be is sent. If this parameter is set to a modest value. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 4. the reselection idle mode. Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs. None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires. range 0-20 dB is recommended. The value indicates a higher access priority. value 0 is recommended. after the NC NC-measurement report is sent. coverage area of the micro cell is large. it sends the extension measurement reports. The network can require the MS to send measurement reports.This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. None Type 1: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the network regardless of whether the BSIC was decoded. the extension measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many bandwidth resources. For the cell with low traffic and low equipment usage. This parameter specifies the frequency index of the interference measurement in type 3 None of the extension measurement report. A higher value Huawei recommends that MSs work in the cell. This parameter specifies whether the 11-bit EGPRS access is supported. Value 1 indicates one PBCCH. some information may be missing. type 2. This parameter specifies whether the CS paging on the A interface is supported. the reselection transfer mode. This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet If this parameter is set to a modest value. None This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS.

this parameter is optional. PAN_INC = 2 x PAN_DEC. 8bit: access using the 8-bit burst 11bit: access using the 11-bit burst This parameter specifies the maximum duration of the non-DRX mode. T3168 is started to radio environment decreases. None Value 0 indicates that PAN_DEC is 0. Level 1 is the highest priority. Therefore. the receive state of the data block is radio resources are not used but occupied. The MS sends measurement reports to the When the radio operating environment is good. the network requests the MS to send measurement reports to control its cell reselection. the TBF transfer mode to the packet idle mode. Value 0 indicates that PAN_INC is 0. When T3182 expires. The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. If When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and no downlink data needs to be sent. value 7 indicates that PAN_INC is 7. increasing use indicates that this parameter is not used. When the MS receives a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message from the network for increasing the value of V(S) or V(A). the timing advance can be obtained without a polling None message. decreasing This parameter specifies the value of PAN_MAX. This parameter specifies the access burst type used by the MS on the PRACH and PTCCH/U. When the GS interface is configured. but the power consumption the CCCH blocks during the non-DRX mode period and the BSC6000 reserves the MS of the MS increases. value 32 indicates that PAN_MAX is 32. the parameter value improves the transmission rate. the BSC compares the Radio Priority in the Channel Request message with the parameter setting in the cell. the MS can detect the Assignment message. many resources are not confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received. After the TBF is released. the average delay of packet access is Uplink Assignment message. Yes: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the cell. the MS sends the Packet used but occupied for a long time. The MS performs automatic cell reselection. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet short. the parameter value reduces the times of abnormally releasing TBFs. set to Pending and the T3198 is started. the speed of This parameter specifies the acknowledgment message type used by the MS. The BSC requests for This parameter specifies whether the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the cell. nc1: MS control with measurement reports. Mode II is selected by default. Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts If the timer is set to a smaller value. Value 4 indicates that PAN_MAX is 4. If the TBF This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet establishment fails. Four access pulses are recommended. the small timer Based on the paging channel used by the system. the MS decreases N3102 by PAN_DEC. The MS may retransmits the RLC data block before the BSC parameter also determines the duration of the T3198 timer. and level 4 is the lowest priority. If four access pulses are used. DRX It takes a shorter time to send the Immediate Assignment (discontinuous reception) is a parameter carried by the cell broadcast message. value No use indicates that this parameter is not used. This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. nc0: Normal MS control. N3102 cannot exceed PAN_MAX. When None an MS accesses the network. In addition. the MS increases N3102 by PAN_INC. Network Operation Operation Mode III. None SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is used to set the DRX period. 8bit is recommended. If the RLC/MAC control block is used. In the cell reselection required by the network. the GPRS network is not configured with the Gs classified into Network Operation Mode I.This parameter specifies the routing area color code of a GPRS cell. many Every time the MS sends an uplink RLC data block. the MS monitors all establishment time decreases. but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description. None This parameter specifies the priority of packet access of MSs to a cell. The access burst type is carried in the packet control acknowledgment Some MSs do not support the 11-bit access burst. value No use indicates that this parameter is not used. Therefore. and Network interface or the PCCCH. If the MS receives a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack If this parameter is set to an excessive value. value No When the radio operating environment is poor. For the BTS and MS supporting the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE-based paging groups on the CCCH. the timing advance can be obtained only by sending a polling message. message. Network Operation Mode II is . This parameter specifies the maximum countdown value of the MS. Usually. However. During the period of non-DRX mode. the This parameter determines BS_CV_MAX and is used for the MS to calculate the CV. TBF establishment failure within a shorter period. Thus. Network Operation Mode I is used. sends an Uplink Acknowledgment message. When the Gs interface or the PCCCH is not configured. (including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. the TBF resources receiving the last data block. Network Operation Mode II. This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. There are three network control None modes. If the value of this parameter is set to a modest value. the network operation modes are Currently. This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after If this parameter is set to a higher value. message on all PCHs and AGCHs in non-DRX mode than in The MS stays in the DRX mode for a certain period when changing from the packet DRX mode. value 7 indicates that PAN_DEC is 7. the MS releases the This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink If the timer is set to a lower value. It is also the maximum value of N3102. PAN_INC should be greater than PAN_DEC.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful